0% found this document useful (0 votes)
10 views

Clearancedb_Admin_Guide

The document is a comprehensive guide for the administration of ClearanceDB within Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization, detailing system requirements, installation, configuration, and analysis procedures. It emphasizes the proprietary nature of the content, the importance of adhering to licensing agreements, and the lack of warranties from Siemens regarding the documentation. Additionally, it includes sections on product updates, issue inheritance, and troubleshooting, ensuring users have the necessary information to effectively manage and utilize ClearanceDB.

Uploaded by

kungwah
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
10 views

Clearancedb_Admin_Guide

The document is a comprehensive guide for the administration of ClearanceDB within Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization, detailing system requirements, installation, configuration, and analysis procedures. It emphasizes the proprietary nature of the content, the importance of adhering to licensing agreements, and the lack of warranties from Siemens regarding the documentation. Additionally, it includes sections on product updates, issue inheritance, and troubleshooting, ensuring users have the necessary information to effectively manage and utilize ClearanceDB.

Uploaded by

kungwah
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 275

TEAMCENTER

VISUALIZATION

ClearanceDB ─
Administration
Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406
Unpublished work. © 2024 Siemens

This Documentation contains trade secrets or otherwise confidential information owned by Siemens Industry Software Inc. or
its affiliates (collectively, “Siemens”), or its licensors. Access to and use of this Documentation is strictly limited as set forth in
Customer’s applicable agreement(s) with Siemens. This Documentation may not be copied, distributed, or otherwise disclosed
by Customer without the express written permission of Siemens, and may not be used in any way not expressly authorized by
Siemens.

This Documentation is for information and instruction purposes. Siemens reserves the right to make changes in specifications
and other information contained in this Documentation without prior notice, and the reader should, in all cases, consult
Siemens to determine whether any changes have been made.
No representation or other affirmation of fact contained in this Documentation shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to
any liability of Siemens whatsoever.
If you have a signed license agreement with Siemens for the product with which this Documentation will be used, your use of
this Documentation is subject to the scope of license and the software protection and security provisions of that agreement.
If you do not have such a signed license agreement, your use is subject to the Siemens Universal Customer Agreement, which
may be viewed at https://www.sw.siemens.com/en-US/sw-terms/base/uca/, as supplemented by the product specific terms
which may be viewed at https://www.sw.siemens.com/en-US/sw-terms/supplements/.
SIEMENS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS DOCUMENTATION INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY. SIEMENS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
PUNITIVE DAMAGES, LOST DATA OR PROFITS, EVEN IF SUCH DAMAGES WERE FORESEEABLE, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED
TO THIS DOCUMENTATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT, EVEN IF SIEMENS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES.

TRADEMARKS: The trademarks, logos, and service marks (collectively, "Marks") used herein are the property of Siemens or other
parties. No one is permitted to use these Marks without the prior written consent of Siemens or the owner of the Marks,
as applicable. The use herein of third party Marks is not an attempt to indicate Siemens as a source of a product, but is
intended to indicate a product from, or associated with, a particular third party. A list of Siemens’ Marks may be viewed at:
www.plm.automation.siemens.com/global/en/legal/trademarks.html. The registered trademark Linux® is used pursuant to a
sublicense from LMI, the exclusive licensee of Linus Torvalds, owner of the mark on a world-wide basis.

About Siemens Digital Industries Software


Siemens Digital Industries Software is a global leader in the growing field of product lifecycle management (PLM),
manufacturing operations management (MOM), and electronic design automation (EDA) software, hardware, and services.
Siemens works with more than 100,000 customers, leading the digitalization of their planning and manufacturing processes. At
Siemens Digital Industries Software, we blur the boundaries between industry domains by integrating the virtual and physical,
hardware and software, design and manufacturing worlds. With the rapid pace of innovation, digitalization is no longer
tomorrow’s idea. We take what the future promises tomorrow and make it real for our customers today. Where today meets
tomorrow. Our culture encourages creativity, welcomes fresh thinking and focuses on growth, so our people, our business, and
our customers can achieve their full potential.

Support Center: support.sw.siemens.com

Send Feedback on Documentation: support.sw.siemens.com/doc_feedback_form


Contents

What is Clearance? 1-1

What is ClearanceDB? 2-1

System requirements
System components ───────────────────────── 3-1
System requirements ───────────────────────── 3-4
Supported platforms ───────────────────────── 3-5
Version compatibility ───────────────────────── 3-7
Supported locales ────────────────────────── 3-7

Installing and configuring ClearanceDB


ClearanceDB installation and configuration overview ────────── 4-1
Typical ClearanceDB environments ────────────────── 4-1
Installing and configuring — quick start ──────────────── 4-4
Quick start steps ───────────────────────────── 4-4
Install the ClearanceDB components (condensed version) ─────────── 4-4
Configure the ClearanceDB Server (condensed version) ──────────── 4-5
Configure the ClearanceDB Proxy (condensed version) ───────────── 4-5
Configure the ClearanceDB Client and Clearance Calculator (condensed version) ─ 4-7
Create and manage the ClearanceDB products (condensed version) ─────── 4-8
Installing and configuring — detailed instructions ─────────── 4-9
Installing the ClearanceDB components (expanded version) ────────── 4-9
Configuring the Server (expanded version) ───────────────── 4-13
Configuring the Proxy (expanded version) ───────────────── 4-31
Configuring the Client and Clearance Calculator (expanded version) ────── 4-52

Performing the analysis


Performing analysis overview ───────────────────── 5-1
Setting up products for analysis ──────────────────── 5-2
Perl and SQL script reference ─────────────────────── 5-2
Setting up products for analysis ────────────────────── 5-4
Configuring the ClearanceDB default product ────────────────
5-5
Create a new ClearanceDB product ───────────────────── 5-6
Using the product-specific configuration file ─────────────────
5-9
Performing analysis ───────────────────────── 5-11
Accuracy of clearance calculations ──────────────────── 5-11
Clearance elements and CAD components ───────────────── 5-12
Configure the Clearance Calculator ──────────────────── 5-17
Run the Clearance Calculator ─────────────────────── 5-19
Understanding the results file format ─────────────────── 5-20

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 3


© 2024 Siemens
Performing clearance batch analysis ───────────────── 5-21
Introduction to performing clearance batch analysis ───────────── 5-21
Creating a Clearance Work Area ────────────────────── 5-21
Create a clearance product ──────────────────────── 5-22
Configure Clearance products for analysis ───────────────── 5-22
Analyze clearance products from the Clearance Work Area ────────── 5-31
Set up end item batch calculation for managed products ─────────── 5-32
Perform clearance analysis using Clearance.exe ─────────────── 5-40
Perl scripts for batch clearance analysis ────────────────── 5-40

Updating products in the database


Updating products in the database ────────────────── 6-1
Configuring ClearanceDB for product updates ───────────── 6-1
Upload product data to the database ───────────────── 6-3
Upload data using the ClearanceDbClient ─────────────── 6-4
Merging results with the database ────────────────── 6-6

Using Mockup to view and manage Clearance results


Viewing and managing results overview ──────────────── 7-1
Enable ClearanceDB within the viewer ───────────────── 7-2
Load ClearanceDB results in the viewer ──────────────── 7-3
Display clearance issue status ───────────────────── 7-3
Update issue status database from the viewer ───────────── 7-4

Attributes
Overview of ClearanceDB product attributes ────────────── 8-1
ClearanceDB product attributes reference ─────────────── 8-1
EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE ────────────────── 8-3
EAICL_GEOMETRY_CHANGE_PART_ATTRIBUTE ───────────── 8-4
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_ASSIGNMENT ─────────── 8-4
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE ────────────── 8-5
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE_CRITERION ───────── 8-5
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_SEARCH_METHOD ───────── 8-5
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_PRIORITY ───────────────── 8-5
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_STATUS ────────────────── 8-5
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_COMMENT ───────────────── 8-6
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_IMPORTANT ──────────────── 8-6
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE_REQUIRED ──────────── 8-6
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE_REFERENCE ──────────── 8-6
EAICL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE_DETECTION ──────────────── 8-6
EAICL_CLEARANCE_DISPOSITION_PERSISTENCE ───────────── 8-8
EAICL_PART_MATCHING_METHOD ─────────────────── 8-8
EAICL_PART_NAME_PROPER ────────────────────── 8-9
EAICL_RULES_PART_ATTRIBUTE ──────────────────── 8-9
EAICL_OCCURRENCE_KEY ─────────────────────── 8-9

4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Contents

EAICL_CHANGE_HISTORY_COLUMN ────────────────── 8-10


EAICL_PRESERVE_RESOLVED_ISSUES ───────────────── 8-11
EAICL_PRODUCT_HISTORY_MAX_ENTRIES ─────────────── 8-12
EAICL_PRODUCT_HISTORY_RETENTION_DAYS ───────────── 8-12
EAICL_PRODUCT_STRUCTURE_CHANGE_TEST ───────────── 8-12
EAICL_PRODUCT_STRUCTURE_CHANGE_REJECTION_PERCENT ────── 8-12
EAICL_RULEBASE_CHANGE_TEST ─────────────────── 8-12
EAICL_RULEBASE_CHANGE_REJECTION_PERCENT ─────────── 8-13
EAICL_TMP_OBJECT_CLEANUP_AGE_IN_DAYS ───────────── 8-13
EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE ─────────────── 8-13
EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE ──────────────── 8-14
EAICL_RESEMBLING_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE ────────────── 8-15
EAICL_MATCHING_CRITERIA_NUMERIC_PRECISION ─────────── 8-16
Upload product attributes to the database ────────────── 8-16
Example configuration file ────────────────────── 8-16

Issue inheritance
Inheritance overview ───────────────────────── 9-1
Configuring the ALL product for issue inheritance ──────────── 9-2
Set up the ALL product for issue inheritance ───────────────── 9-2
Define groups for the ALL product ───────────────────── 9-2
Example configuration file for the ALL product ──────────────── 9-3
Deploying the issue inheritance mechanism ────────────── 9-3
Enable the issue inheritance mechanism ────────────────── 9-3
Disable the issue inheritance mechanism ────────────────── 9-4
Modifying the issue inheritance mechanism ───────────────── 9-5

Log files
Understanding ClearanceDB log files ───────────────── 10-1
Understanding ClearanceDB advanced log files ──────────── 10-4

Rules
What are clearance rules? ────────────────────── 11-1
Using rules in clearance analysis ─────────────────── 11-2
ClearanceDB rules and conditions details ────────────── 11-11
Upload rules and conditions to the database ───────────── 11-14

Images
What are clearance images? ───────────────────── 12-1
Create images in batch using Mockup ───────────────── 12-2

Server-side filters
Server-side filters ────────────────────────── 13-1
Filter modes ──────────────────────────── 13-1

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5


© 2024 Siemens
Referencing part attributes ───────────────────── 13-2
Create server-side filters ─────────────────────── 13-2

Zones
Defining clearance zones ────────────────────── 14-1
Understanding clearance zones ─────────────────── 14-1
Uploading zones to the database ─────────────────── 14-2
Example zones file ───────────────────────── 14-2

Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter


Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter ───────────────── 15-1
Product and system requirements ────────────────── 15-2
Enable batch clearance calculation for ClearanceDB ────────── 15-2
Steps to analyze managed products ───────────────── 15-3
Performing adhoc ClearanceDB analysis ─────────────── 15-4
Define ClearanceDB roles ────────────────────── 15-4
Configuring ClearanceDB to work with Teamcenter ────────── 15-4
Teamcenter global configuration options ────────────────── 15-4
Specify to use absolute occurrence IDs ────────────────── 15-13
Configure the Clearance.cfgproduct file ────────────────── 15-13
Encrypt the Teamcenter user password ────────────────── 15-14
Configuring ClearanceDB for multifield key data ────────────── 15-15
Optionally configure Teamcenter export for 4GD worksets ────────── 15-15
Caching managed data for analysis ──────────────────── 15-18
Set the default owner for each clearance result ────────────── 15-22
Analyzing managed ClearanceDB products ────────────── 15-23
Analyze managed ClearanceDB products ───────────────── 15-23
Analyze a managed product ─────────────────────── 15-24
Example output from managed analysis ───────────────── 15-26
View results in the Lifecycle Viewer and Structure Manager ───────── 15-30
Working with Design Context ──────────────────── 15-31
Work with Design Context ─────────────────────── 15-31
Design Context clearance analysis modes ───────────────── 15-32
Specify connection information for Design Context ───────────── 15-34
Specify to create an SCO for clearance results ─────────────── 15-35
Display additional clearance results information ────────────── 15-36
Load ClearanceDB results in Design Context ──────────────── 15-36
Perform real-time analysis ─────────────────────── 15-37
Open clearance results in an SCO ──────────────────── 15-37
Working with variants ─────────────────────── 15-38
Understanding variant-based clearance analysis ────────────── 15-38
Variant-based clearance analysis methods ───────────────── 15-41
Variant-based clearance analysis (client-side) ─────────────── 15-42
Variant-based clearance analysis (server-side) ─────────────── 15-44
Using ClearanceDB with Active Workspace ────────────── 15-46
Clone stable IDs ──────────────────────────── 15-46

6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Contents

Maintaining the database


Database maintenance overview ─────────────────── 16-1
Understanding the Simple Security Model ─────────────── 16-1
Automatic database maintenance ────────────────── 16-3
Execute stored procedures ────────────────────── 16-4
Enforcing the integrity of input data ───────────────── 16-5
Available status reports ─────────────────────── 16-6

Troubleshooting
Loading results in the viewer ──────────────────── 17-1
Frozen Clearance Results window ────────────────── 17-1
Clearance results disappear after user deletes a filter ───────── 17-1
Viewer licensing in Teamcenter ─────────────────── 17-2
Viewer preferences and settings ─────────────────── 17-3
Perl compatibility and configuration ───────────────── 17-3
Loading clearance results after an Oracle upgrade ─────────── 17-4

Other resources 18-1

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 7


© 2024 Siemens
8 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406
© 2024 Siemens
1. What is Clearance?
Clearance analysis

Clearance analysis identifies points of contact and/or penetration between elements or groups in your
3D model. Elements may be parts, leaf components, or end items.

The clearance requirement is the minimum allowed distance between any two elements within the
analysis scope. Clearance requirements are measured in the same units as your 3D model. Elements that
are in contact have a clearance requirement of 0.

Clearance analysis involves:

• Specifying the clearance settings that affect the type, precision, and nature of the analysis.

• Performing the clearance analysis on your model.

• Analyzing clearance violations (results) in the Viewing window.

• Disposition clearance issues by assigning a priority, status, and owner to element pairs on the Results
list.

• Refine the analysis by creating clearance rules to reduce false positive clearance results.

Clearance results types

When you perform a clearance check, any two parts or elements that are closer to one another than
a specified distance are identified as an issue for further investigation. The Results list displays the

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 1-1


© 2024 Siemens
1. What is Clearance?

clearance issues identified by the analysis, along with the distance value between element pairs and
other relevant information such as the interference type.

Clearance interferences can be soft or hard. Soft interferences are distance violations. They occur when
the distance between two elements is equal to or closer than the specified minimum distance. Elements
involved in a soft interference do not touch or penetrate one another. Hard interferences are contact or
penetration violations. They occur when two elements touch or occupy the same geometric space.

The table below describes each clearance type and provides examples to help you understand the
criteria used to identify them.

Appears in the
This type results list as Indicating this
Contact C A hard interference. The elements are in contact but do not
penetrate. The distance result is always ~ 0.0.

Note:
Clearance results are approximate if your elements do
not consist of precise geometry.
Clearance results of geometrically similar parts that
overlap may not recognize the contact if the individual
polygons in the tessellated versions of the parts exactly
correspond to each other.

Contact

Distance D A soft interference. The elements are closer than the specified
minimum clearance requirement, but do not come into
contact with or penetrate one another. The distance result is
always a value greater than ~ 0.0.

1-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Appears in the
This type results list as Indicating this

Distance

Duplicate Dup The clearance calculation has determined that the elements
are duplicates based on the bounding box, surface area,
volume, and center of gravity. If these four attributes are the
same then the parts are considered duplicates.

Failure F The clearance calculation has failed to complete. This


clearance type can appear only in results generated in Batch
Mode, most likely with ClearanceDB analysis. This may happen
if the Clearance Calculator crashes.
Penetration P A hard interference. One element penetrates or is completely
contained by another. The distance result is always a value less
than ~ 0.0.

Note:
Penetration values are always approximate, even when
using precise geometry.

Note:
Penetrations are not detected automatically unless the
Distinguish between Contact and Penetrations check

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 1-3


© 2024 Siemens
1. What is Clearance?

Appears in the
This type results list as Indicating this
box is selected in the calculator settings. If this option
is not turned on, penetrations are categorized as the
Unknown clearance type, and you must perform further
analysis to identify the issue as a penetration.

Partial penetration

For a clearance issue that consists of a pair of elements


where one element is completely contained within another,
the distance value is the approximate penetration depth of
the contained element. If the minimum distance between
elements is ~ 0.0 (the elements are in contact with
one another), and the elements contain NURBS data, the
penetration depth is the length of the bounding box diagonal
of the inner element.

Note:
If the minimum distance between elements is ~ 0.0
and the parts do not contain NURBS data, the issue is
classified as a contact.

Full penetration (elements in contact)

If the minimum distance between elements is greater than ~


0.0 (the elements are not in contact with one another), the
1-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406
© 2024 Siemens
Appears in the
This type results list as Indicating this
penetration depth is the minimum distance plus the distance
the minimum distance vector extends to the further side of the
inner elements' bounding box.

Full penetration (elements are apart)

Note:
• Completely contained elements are categorized as
penetrations only if the outer element is geometrically
closed.

• The inner element must consist of tessellated


geometry. An element pair with an inner element that
consists only of wireframe geometry is not identified
as a penetration.

• An inner element with a material thickness value


that causes the element to extend beyond the outer
element is considered completely contained and
identified as a penetration.

Thickness T A violation where material thickness is a factor of the


calculation. Further analysis is required to detect whether an
issue involving material thickness is a soft or hard interference.
The distance result can be a value less than or greater than ~
0.0.

Note:
Element pairs with material thickness values that come
into contact or penetrate one another are identified as
the Unknown clearance type. Contact, penetration, and
distance line analysis are not available for clearance

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 1-5


© 2024 Siemens
1. What is Clearance?

Appears in the
This type results list as Indicating this
issues that contain element pairs with material thickness
values.

Thickness

Unknown U A hard interference. Further analysis is required to classify as a


contact or penetration.

1-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
2. What is ClearanceDB?
Teamcenter Clearance Database (ClearanceDB) enables customers to detect, manage, and resolve spatial
interference issues as they arise during a product’s lifecycle. By automating this process and constantly
re-evaluating on a regular basis, customers can identify design flaws that may have otherwise delayed
the release of new product offerings, increased costs, or jeopardized quality.

Content for system administrator tasks and using Clearance.exe can be found in the ClearanceDB ─
Administration help. Content for using Teamcenter lifecycle visualization mockup to create clearance
rules and conditions can be found in the Performing Clearance analysis section of the Working with 3D
Models help.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 2-1


© 2024 Siemens
2. What is ClearanceDB?

Capabilities

The Clearance db server option provides the following capabilities:

• Completely automated, intelligent batch clearance analysis that is continuously updated.

• Analysis results are stored in the Clearance database.

• The Clearance database can be accessed by users at any time to understand the number and
severity of clearance issues for any product, or to investigate specific issues in Teamcenter lifecycle
visualization mockup.

• Customers can analyze and manage clearance issues across multiple product configurations,
derivatives, and options by integrating the clearance analysis process into a Teamcenter-managed
product lifecycle.

Benefits

• Automates the checking and reporting process to facilitate faster, repeatable, and more accurate
clearance evaluations.

• Reduces development cost by enabling engineers to catch design flaws early in the lifecycle.

• Fosters innovation by enabling designers and engineers to focus on products instead of DMU (Digital
Mockup) issues.

• Reduces design cost by enabling design engineers to digitally integrate the entire product.

2-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
The ClearanceDB process

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 2-3


© 2024 Siemens
2. What is ClearanceDB?

2-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
3. System requirements
System components

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 3-1


© 2024 Siemens
3. System requirements

The basic ClearanceDB architecture along with descriptions of the role of each component in the
ClearanceDB process is as follows.

Note:
• You can install each of the ClearanceDB software components on a separate machine, or
group any combination of components on a single machine or multiple machines. All of these
components also can be installed on a single machine for testing purposes.

3-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
System components

• In general, the ClearanceDB software components running on each tier along with the client
and proxy components must be from the same release. Additionally, the server component
must be at least as recent as or higher than the client and proxy components.
The following scenarios can help understand the support criteria.

Server release Client release Proxy release Whether supported


8.1 8.0 8.0 Yes
8.0 8.1 8.1 No
8.0 8.0 8.1 No

Client tier

The Client tier consists of ClearanceDB applications such as the Clearance Calculator, Mockup or the
Teamcenter Rich Client with the RDV option, and the ClearanceDbClient.

• Clearance Calculator: The Clearance Calculator accesses product information from the database in
order to perform rules-based clearance analysis. A command line application, the Calculator is
typically run on a predetermined schedule using a batch file or script. The Calculator generates a
results file, which is uploaded to the database via the ClearanceDB Client or SQL*Plus on a machine
with an Oracle Client installation.

• Mockup or the Teamcenter Rich Client: Mockup or a supported Teamcenter application such as Design
Context loads the ClearanceDB analysis results associated with a particular product for the purpose of
managing relevant issues within a visual environment. End users can review ClearanceDB issues and
update their status within the database.

• ClearanceDB Client: The ClearanceDB Client communicates with the proxy tier components, enabling
ClearanceDB administrators to upload product configurations, rules and conditions, zones, and results
to the database.

Proxy tier

The proxy tier consists of the ClearanceDB Proxy and the Oracle Instant Client:

• ClearanceDB Proxy: This component consists of three applications, the ClearanceDbProxyServer,


ClearanceDBProxyHttpServer, and the ClearanceDbProxyClient. Only the ClearanceDbProxyServer
and ClearanceDBProxyHttpServer (optional) need to be started by the administrator; the
ClearanceDbProxyClient is invoked automatically by the ClearanceDbProxyServer. The ClearanceDB
Proxy facilitates communication between the ClearanceDB client tier and the Oracle database.

ClearanceDBProxyHttpServer.exe is a web service executable added to the proxy tier to support HTTP/
s-based communication between clients and Clearance database. This communication protocol is
optional and can be configured via settings defined in the configuration file.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 3-3


© 2024 Siemens
3. System requirements

• Oracle Instant Client: The Oracle Instant Client handles communication between the proxy and the
database.

Server tier

The server tier is an Oracle Database server with a ClearanceDB database instance:

• ClearanceDB Server: This component consists of an Oracle Database installation populated with
appropriate user information, product configurations, rules and conditions, zones, results, and issue
dispositions.

System requirements
Perl requirements

The ClearanceDB client and proxy tiers require Perl version 5.03 or later. If Perl is not already installed
on your system or you have a version earlier than 5.03, many sources are available for you to manually
install the latest distribution, such as from http://www.activestate.com.

ClearanceDB Server requirements

ClearanceDB Server is supported on Oracle Enterprise and Standard Editions.

The ClearanceDB Server requires Oracle Net Services, sqlplus, and sqlldr, to run the ClearanceDB SQL
scripts.

For information about system hardware and software requirements, choose from links found in the
Hardware and Software Certifications knowledge base article on Support Center (scroll down to the
Teamcenter Visualization Software Certifications heading).

For supported platform requirements, see Supported platforms.

ClearanceDB Http Server requirements

• SSO (single sign-on) setup on the client machines. For information on setting up the SSO
environment, see Security Services Installation/Customization in Security Services Configuration.

• Teamcenter Web Applications Manager with the Identity and Login providers on the Server. For
information on setting up the Identity, and Login providers, see Security Services Installation/
Customization in Security Services Configuration.

Teamcenter Server with SSO support is required when using this feature.

• Apache Web Server, Tomcat, or WebLogic in conjunction with ApacheDS (Directory Services) or
equivalent LDAP for authentication.

3-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Supported platforms

• Ideally, ClearanceDbProxyHttpServer.exe should be configured to run behind an Apache reverse proxy


for security reasons. It is also possible to run ClearanceDbProxyHttpServer.exe as a secure server.

ClearanceDB Proxy requirements

The ClearanceDB proxy tier requires the Oracle Instant Client Basic (not Basic Lite) package.

For information about system hardware and software requirements, choose from links found in the
Hardware and Software Certifications knowledge base article on Support Center (scroll down to the
Teamcenter Visualization Software Certifications heading).

For supported platform requirements, see Supported platforms.

Clearance Calculator Client requirements

For Clearance Calculator, which is part of the client tier, a minimum of 16 GB RAM and 4 CPU
cores is recommended. Performance increases with additional RAM and CPU resources. For high end
installations, it is not unusual to have 512 GB of RAM and 32 cores (or more).

Supported platforms
For more information about supported virtual machines, please contact your Siemens Digital Industries
Software representative.

For information about the platforms on which you can run Teamcenter lifecycle visualization, download
the appropriate platform matrix spreadsheet from Support Center.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 3-5


© 2024 Siemens
3. System requirements

1. On the lifecycle visualization page, click the Support White Papers x.x tile.

2. Download a platform matrix spreadsheet from the list.

3. (Optional) To see supported platforms for other lifecycle visualization versions, click More Versions
and then select a version under the Support White Papers heading.

3-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Version compatibility

Version compatibility
Version compatibility with Teamcenter

ClearanceDB support for Teamcenter versions is consistent with Lifecycle Visualization support.
Download the Teamcenter Interoperability Matrix spreadsheet found on the Support White Papers
Certifications page on Support Center.

Version compatibility within ClearanceDB tiers

• Client (Mockup, Clearance.exe, ClearanceDbClient.exe) and Proxy (ClearanceDbProxyServer.exe,


ClearanceDbProxyHttpServer.exe, and ClearanceDbProxyClient.exe) — Must all come from the same
exact Lifecycle Visualization version.

• Server — Must be the same or later version than the client and proxy within the same release, for
example, 10.x. In some cases, a server that is a higher version than the client, for example, an 11.1
server and a 10.1 client, may work, but specific cases need to be confirmed through your Siemens
Digital Industries Software representative.

Supported locales
In general, ClearanceDB results can be loaded and managed using localized Teamcenter and Teamcenter
lifecycle visualization in any single-byte locale. However, the ClearanceDB application is only partially
localized, as outlined below.

Tip:
A single byte (8 bits) is sufficient to represent an alphabet with 256 characters, which is sufficient
for languages such as English, French, Italian, German, and Spanish. But languages such as
Chinese or Japanese can have thousands of characters, which is too many to be represented by a
single byte, so those languages are referred to as multibyte.

ClearanceDB Server (Clearance database)

• Strings originating from the Clearance database (including ClearanceDB reports, column names,
Oracle errors, and ClearanceDB server errors) are not localized. They will always appear in English.

• Any user data entered into the Clearance database, such as product names, issue dispositions, and
rules and conditions, must be single-byte.

Teamcenter

Any data coming into ClearanceDB from Teamcenter via BOMwriter PLM XML export (including product
names, part names, and metadata) must be single-byte, since ClearanceDB can only consume single-
byte data.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 3-7


© 2024 Siemens
3. System requirements

Clearance.exe

Strings originating from the Clearance.exe (informational and error messages) are fully localized.

ClearanceDB Proxy

Strings originating from the ClearanceDB Proxy (informational and error messages) are fully localized.

ClearanceDB Working Directory

All files under the ClearanceDB working directory, such as .cfg files, .csvcldb files, and product names,
must be single-byte.

ClearanceDB Perl Scripts

Strings originating from the ClearanceDB Perl scripts, (informational and error messages) are not
localized. They will always appear in English.

3-8 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB
ClearanceDB installation and configuration overview
Follow the steps in the Installing and configuring — quick start section to set up a ClearanceDB
environment from scratch. The quick start topics contain links to sections within Installing and
configuring — detailed instructions that provide in-depth coverage of each step. For best results, follow
the exact order of the quick start steps when setting up your ClearanceDB environment.

The Next steps portion of the quick start process provides links you to locations within the ClearanceDB
─ Administration deliverable that detail tasks you can complete once the ClearanceDB environment
is set up. For example, creating auxiliary users with roles (permissions), and using Mockup, Active
Workspace, and Teamcenter with ClearanceDB.

Typical ClearanceDB environments


The images below provide examples of typical ClearanceDB environments. The following apply:

• Most often, the Server, Proxy, Client/Calculator, and Mockup are located on different machines.

• The ClearanceDB Server is usually installed and configured by an Oracle specialist.

• Generally, there is a single Calculation Server, which runs on a dedicated machine; however, you can
configure multiple Calculation Servers, if desired.

• There can also be as many Proxy Servers as desired.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-1


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

4-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Typical ClearanceDB environments

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-3


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Installing and configuring — quick start

Quick start steps

To set up a ClearanceDB environment, complete the following steps.

1. Installing the ClearanceDB components

1. Install the ClearanceDB components.

2. Configure the ClearanceDB Server.

3. Configure the ClearanceDB Proxy.

4. Configure the ClearanceDB Client and Clearance calculator.

2. Creating and managing ClearanceDB products

• Create and manage the ClearanceDB default product.

3. Completing the next steps

• Use roles to grant or restrict access.

• Create auxiliary users.

• Use Mockup to view and manage Clearance results.

• Use ClearanceDB with Teamcenter.

• Use ClearanceDB with Active Workspace.

Install the ClearanceDB components (condensed version)

Use the Teamcenter Visualization - InstallShield Wizard to install any combination of the following
ClearanceDB components:

4-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Configure the ClearanceDB Server (condensed version)

Components can be installed on a single machine


or on separate machines by running the installer on
multiple machines.

• ClearanceDB Server

• ClearanceDB Proxy

• ClearanceDB Client

• Clearance Calculator

• Teamcenter lifecycle visualization mockup

See the following topics for more information on installing the ClearanceDB components:

• Install ClearanceDB components on Windows

• Install ClearanceDB components on Linux

Configure the ClearanceDB Server (condensed version)

For more detailed information on the steps below, see Configuring the Server (expanded version).

1. If you did not install the ClearanceDB Server when you installed other ClearanceDB components,
use the Teamcenter Visualization - InstallShield Wizard to do so now.

2. Create the ClearanceDB database on your Oracle Server.

3. Use either Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Control or sqlplus to create the following two
ClearanceDB tablespaces in your database: CL_TABLE and CL_INDEX.

4. Use sqlplus and the cre_ClearanceDB_user.sql script to create a ClearanceDB Oracle user.

Configure this user to store product configurations, unique definitions of rules and conditions,
zones, analysis results, and issue dispositions.

5. Use sqlplus and the upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql script to update the Oracle user created in the
previous step.

Configure the ClearanceDB Proxy (condensed version)

For more detailed information on the steps below, see Configuring the Proxy (expanded version).

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-5


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

1. If you did not install the ClearanceDB Proxy when you installed other ClearanceDB components,
use the Teamcenter Visualization - InstallShield Wizard to do so now.

2. Install the Oracle Instant Client (Windows or Linux).

Use the Oracle Instant Client to connect from the Proxy Server to the ClearanceDB on the Oracle
Server.

3. Create the ClearanceDB Work Area.

4. Define the following values in the global.dbc file for your work area:

• DATASOURCE — Proxy Server machine name and port number.

• CONNECT_DATA — name identifying the connection between the Proxy Server and
ClearanceDB.

5. Define the following default Proxy settings using one of the methods outlined in the table below.

• OracleClientDirectory — full path to the Oracle Instant Client.

• Port — port number of the ClearanceDB Proxy Server. Use the following format:

<port number>,<number of threads listening to the port>

• CONNECT_DATA — <connect_name>,<user>/<password>@<service_name>

To Do this
Apply these default settings to all Define the default Proxy settings in the Clearance.cfgglobal
Proxies created after this step. file of your ClearanceDB_Work_Area.
Apply these default settings to only Define the default Proxy settings in the Proxy's
the Proxy defined in the next step Clearance.cfgglobal file after you define it in the next step.
of this procedure. These settings are applied only to this Proxy.

6. Use the create_proxy.pl script to create a ClearanceDB Proxy.

(Optional) Define the default Proxy settings in this Proxy's Clearance.cfgglobal file. Refer to the
previous step for details.

7. Start the ClearanceDB Proxy using one of the following methods.

• Use the start_proxy.pl script.

• (Windows, only) Right-click the Clearance.cfgproxy file and select Start Proxy.

4-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Configure the ClearanceDB Client and Clearance Calculator (condensed version)

8. Ping the Proxy and database to verify the Proxy is working properly using one of the following
methods.

To Do this
Ping the Proxy. • Use the ping_proxy.pl script.

• (Windows, only) Right-click the global.dbc file of your


ClearanceDB_Work_Area and select Ping Proxy.
Ping the ClearanceDB • Use the ping_database.pl script.
database.
• (Windows, only) Right-click the global.dbc file of your
ClearanceDB_Work_Area and select Ping Database

Configure the ClearanceDB Client and Clearance Calculator (condensed


version)

For more detailed information on the steps below, see Configuring the Client (expanded version).

1. If you did not install the ClearanceDB Client and Clearance Calculator when you installed other
ClearanceDB components, use the Teamcenter Visualization - InstallShield Wizard to do so now.

For the purposes of the Quick Start procedure, it is assumed that the ClearanceDB Client and
Clearance Calculator are located on the same machine; however, you can install them on separate
machines, if preferred. See Performing Clearance batch analysis for more information.

2. Create the ClearanceDB Work Area.

If you are installing the ClearanceDB Client and ClearanceDB Proxy on the same machine, you can
use the same ClearanceDB_Work_Area that you set up when you installed the ClearanceDB Proxy.
If you are installing the ClearanceDB Client on a separate machine, create a ClearanceDB Work Area
on the machine where you are installing the Client.

3. Define the following values in the global.dbc file for your work area:

If you are using the same ClearanceDB_Work_Area that you set up when you installed the
ClearanceDB Proxy, you can skip this step. If you are installing the ClearanceDB Client on a
separate machine, define the global.dbc file values on the machine where you are installing the
ClearanceDB Client.

• DATASOURCE — Client Server machine name and port number.

• CONNECT_DATA — name identifying the connection between the Client Server and
ClearanceDB.

4. To be able to generate a ClearanceDB result and upload the file, do the following.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-7


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

a. Open the Clearance.cfgglobal file in a text editor.

b. Navigate to Section 4: Clearance Analysis configuration.

c. Comment out this line:

RulesObject - Universal Clearance Requirement

d. Uncomment these lines:

RulesObject = Requirement Rules from ClearanceDB Server

ResultsObject = ClearanceDB Results

Create and manage the ClearanceDB products (condensed version)

You must create a ClearanceDB default product before creating new products in the Clearance database.
The default product is a global configuration that you can customize to match your unique analysis
requirement and automatically apply to new products that you create.

1. If you did not create a default product when you created the ClearanceDB_Work_Area, create a
default product.

2. Update the product to your database.

3. Do one of the following to view all products in your database.

• Run the list_all_products.pl script.

• (Windows, only) Right-click the global.dbc file in the ClearanceDB_Work_Area and select List All
Products.

4. Create, analyze, and update local products in your ClearanceDB.

If Then do this
You have local data to Create a new ClearanceDB product.
use to create products.
You do not have local a. Download the Example files through the Teamcenter Visualization
data but would like - InstallShield Wizard found under Help and Miscellaneous
to do a test run you Features.
can use the Example
data provided during
installation.

4-8 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Install ClearanceDB components on Windows

If Then do this

b. Create a new ClearanceDB product.


You would like to Read through Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter and complete the
use data managed in configuration tasks outline in this content before creating a new
Teamcenter. ClearanceDB product.

5. Specify new ClearanceDB products in the Clearance.cfgproduct file.

6. (Optional) Specify options for Clearance analysis by configuring the Clearance Calculator.

If you are not concerned about Clearance analysis options you can analyze the products using the
default options.

7. Analyze the products by running the Clearance calculator.

8. Use the update_product.pl script to upload the ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb file.

The ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb file will display in the product directory once analysis is
complete. Use the [-ud] flag to upload the file to the database.

9. Use the list_product.pl script to view the product data.

Installing and configuring — detailed instructions

Installing the ClearanceDB components (expanded version)

Install ClearanceDB components on Windows

1. Locate the Teamcenter lifecycle visualization installation image.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-9


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

2. Run setup.exe.

3. In the Teamcenter Visualization - InstallShield Wizard dialog box, click Next.

4. Click the + icon next to ClearanceDB.

5. Click the icon next to each ClearanceDB component that you want to install and choose This
feature will be installed on local hard drive.

You can choose to install any combination of the following components on a single machine:

• Clearance Calculator

• ClearanceDB Proxy

• ClearanceDB Client

• ClearanceDB Server

Tip:
You can also install ClearanceDB example data by navigating to Help and Miscellaneous
Features→Example Files→ClearanceDB Example Files.

6. To change the destination, click Change, browse to a new location, and click OK.

7. Click Next.

8. In Language Selection, click Next.

9. In License Type, do one of the following:

Choose this option Then do this


Install a node-locked Enter the file path, or click Browse to locate the appropriate file and
license from this file then click Open.
Obtain a license Do one of the following:
from a license server
machine • If you are setting up a single license server, enter the Server Name
and Server Port.
Note:
This option is The license.dat files in the license folder of the client will be
also used when updated.
the same
• If you are setting up a redundant license server:

4-10 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Install ClearanceDB components on Linux

Choose this option Then do this


machine acts as a. Enter the server name and port numbers in the Server Name
the License box:
Server. It is for a
1 license SERVER port@host1;port@host2;port@host3
type of license.
b. Leave Server Port blank.

The registry keys will be updated and the license.dat files in the
license folder for the client will not be updated (the client will
have no server information listed).

Note:
For more on redundant license servers see the licensing guides,
available in the Licensing directory.

Do not modify the No further action is necessary.


existing license file(s)

Note:
For more information on licensing, see Teamcenter lifecycle visualization Installation.

10. In Ready to Install the Program, click Next.

11. Click Install.

The selected components are installed. This may take several minutes.

12. Click Finish.

Install ClearanceDB components on Linux

Note:
Teamcenter lifecycle visualization mockup is supported only on the Windows platform; however,
the server components are supported on Linux and Windows.

1. Log in as root.

2. Browse to the Teamcenter lifecycle visualization software distribution image directory.

3. Type ./setup to run the installer.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-11


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

4. Click Install Software.

5. In Teamcenter lifecycle visualization Setup window, click Next.

6. In the Choose Location window, specify the installation location and click Next.

7. In the Select Platforms window, select the platform on which to install the software and click
Next.

8. In the Language Selection window, select the languages to install and click Next.

9. In the Select Components window, select the products and components to install.

You can choose to install any combination of the following ClearanceDB components on a single
machine:

• Clearance Calculator

• ClearanceDB Proxy

• ClearanceDB Client

• ClearanceDB Server

Tip:
To install ClearanceDB example data, choose Help and Miscellaneous Product
Features→ClearanceDB Example Files.

10. Click Next.

11. In the License Type, do one of the following:

Choose this option Then do this


Do not modify the existing license file(s) No further action is necessary.
Obtain a license from a license server machine Enter the Server Name and Server Port.

Note:
For more information on licensing Teamcenter lifecycle visualization, see Installation.

12. Click Next.

4-12 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
ClearanceDB Server overview

13. In the Ready to Install window, review the current settings (click Back to make any changes) and
when ready to continue, click Next.

The installation process begins and a window displays the progress and lists the files being
installed.

14. In the Installation Complete window, click Finish.

15. To close the installer, click Exit.

Configuring the Server (expanded version)

ClearanceDB Server overview

The ClearanceDB Server tier consists of an Oracle Server installation with a database instance
configured with the ClearanceDB schema. The ClearanceDB database stores user information, product
configurations, rules, conditions, zones, results, and issue dispositions.

Create the ClearanceDB database

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-13


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

On your Oracle Server, create a database instance to store ClearanceDB information.

1. Start the Oracle Database Configuration Assistant.

2. On the Welcome page, click Next.

3. On the Step 1 of 12: Operations page, ensure Create a Database is selected, and then click Next.

4. On the Step 2 of 12: Database Templates page, select General Purpose, and then click Next.

5. On the Step 3 of 12: Database Identifier page, in the Global Database Name box, type a name for
the ClearanceDB database.

6. In the SID box, type a name for the Oracle System Identifier (SID).

7. Click Next.

8. On the Step 4 of 12: Management Options page, accept the defaults, and then click Next.

9. On the Step 5 of 12: Database Credentials page, select Use the Same Password for All Accounts,
and then type the password you want to use for the SYS, SYSTEM, DBSNMP, and SYSMAN accounts.

10. On the Step 6 of 12: Storage Options page, accept the default, and then click Next.

11. On the Step 7 of 12: Database File Locations page, accept the default, and then click Next.

12. On the Step 8 of 12: Recovery Configuration page, accept the defaults, and then click Next.

13. On the Step 9 of 12: Database Content page, ensure Sample Schemas is not selected, and then
click Next.

14. On the Step 10 of 12: Initialization Parameters page, accept the defaults, and then click Next.

15. On the Step 11 of 12: Database Storage page, accept the defaults, and then click Next.

16. On the Step 12 of 12: Creation Options page, ensure Create Database is selected, and then click
Finish.

17. Review the Database Details report, and then click OK.

Creation of the database begins. When the database is created, the Database Configuration
Assistant dialog box appears.

18. Click Exit.

4-14 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Tune the database memory parameters

You are now ready to create the listener.

Tune the database memory parameters

Modify the following settings for optimal database performance.

1. Using the Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Control, login as a user with SYSDBA privileges to
your ClearanceDB database instance.

2. On the Administration page, in the Database Configuration section, click Memory Parameters.

3. On the Memory Parameters page, in the Current Allocation section, click Disable.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-15


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

4. On the Disable Automatic Shared Memory Management page, in the New Size (MB) box for the
Shared Pool parameter, type 100.

5. In the New Size (MB) box for the Buffer Cache parameter, type 600.

6. Click OK.

You are now ready to create the ClearanceDB database tablespaces.

Create the ClearanceDB tablespaces

ClearanceDB requires the following tablespaces within your database instance:

• CL_TABLE

• CL_INDEX

Create the CL_TABLE tablespace

1. Using the Oracle Enterprise Manager Database Control, login as a user with SYSDBA privileges to
your ClearanceDB database instance.

4-16 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Create the ClearanceDB tablespaces

2. On the Administration page, in the Storage section, click Tablespaces.

3. On the Tablespaces page, click Create.

4. On the Create Tablespace page, in the Name box, type CL_TABLE.

5. Click Add.

6. On the Add Datafile page, in the File Name box, type CL_TABLE.

7. In the File Size box, type 600.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-17


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

8. Click Continue.

9. On the Create Tablespace page, click OK.

The CL_TABLE tablespace is created.

Create the CL_INDEX tablespace

1. On the Tablespaces page, click Create.

2. On the Create Tablespace page, in the Name box, type CL_INDEX.

3. Click Add.

4. On the Add Datafile page, in the File Name box, type CL_INDEX.

5. In the File Size box, type 180.

4-18 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Install a ClearanceDB patch

6. Click Continue.

7. On the Create Tablespace page, click OK.

The CL_INDEX tablespace is created.

Install a ClearanceDB patch

Typically there are several steps required to apply a ClearanceDB patch to an existing installation.

1. Review the ReadMe file included with the patch for possible additional instructions.

2. If the patch is a Teamcenter for lifecycle visualization Maintenance Patch or Service Release, run the
upgrade installer as described in Teamcenter Rich Client Installation on Windows in the Teamcenter
help.

3. Run the upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql database upgrade script.

Upgrade an existing database

You must run the upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql script to update an existing database to work with a newer
version of ClearanceDB.

1. Open a command prompt and navigate to the ClearanceDB SQL scripts, which are located at the
following location within the stand-alone Lifecycle Visualization installation:

• (Windows) <Mockup installation directory>\Products\Mockup\ClearanceDB\Server

• (Linux) <Mockup installation directory>/Visualization/bin/ClearanceDB/Server

2. From the command prompt, type

sqlplus "<owner>/<password>@<connection>" @upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql <logfile>


<dflt_tablespace> <index_tablespace>

where

For this parameter Type


owner The user name of the ClearanceDB Oracle user account.
password The password for the Oracle user account.
connection The Local Net Service Name for the ClearanceDB Oracle database.
logfile The name that you want to give the log file that is created when you run the
upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql script. For example, updatelog.txt.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-19


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

For this parameter Type


dflt_tablespace CL_TABLE. This is the name of a ClearanceDB tablespace.
indx_tablespace CL_INDEX. This is the name of a ClearanceDB tablespace.

Example:
sqlplus "clowner/clowner@cldata" @upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql updatelog.txt CL_TABLE
CL_INDEX

Note:
The ClearanceDB SQL scripts are case-sensitive.

Tip:
If the database is updated, the end of the log file displays a message similar to this:
On 2007/07/11 at 23:20:00 THE INSTALLATION SUCCEEDED. PL/SQL procedure successfully
completed.

Upgrading a ClearanceDB from Oracle 12c to Oracle 19c

1. Update the Lifecycle Visualization client.

2. For Lifecycle Visualization versions 13.1.x and below, do the following:

a. Log in to SQLPlus from the command line with a user account that has SYSDBA privileges.

b. Run the following command:

exec eaicl_p_clean;

3. Upgrade the ClearanceDB instance from Oracle 12c to Oracle 19c.

4. Log in to SQLPlus from the command line with a user account that has SYSDBA privileges and run:

GRANT CREATE JOB TO <Your Clearance DB user>;

5. Log in to SQLPlus from the command line as <ClearanceDBUserName> and run the
upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql script.

4-20 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Creating user accounts

Create user accounts

Creating user accounts

A ClearanceDB user account is essentially an Oracle user configured to store ClearanceDB products,
which include configuration information, unique definitions of rules , zones, and analysis results.
ClearanceDB products are also associated with the status of design issues as specified by the end user in
the viewer.

Note:
You cannot query across database instances, users, or products.

Create Oracle users

Create Oracle user accounts to store product configurations, unique definitions of rules and conditions,
zones, analysis results, and issue dispositions. Execute the cre_ClearanceDB_user.sql script to create a
ClearanceDB Oracle user.

1. Configure ClearanceDB Server.

2. Open a command prompt and navigate to the ClearanceDB SQL scripts, which are located at the
following location within the stand-alone Lifecycle Visualization installation:

• <Mockup installation directory>\Products\Mockup\ClearanceDB\Server

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-21


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

3. At the command prompt, type

sqlplus "<dba>/<password>@<connection> AS SYSDBA" @cre_ClearanceDB_user.sql <logfile>


<owner> <password> <dflt_tablespace> <temp_tablespace>

where

For this parameter Type


dba The user name of the SYS or SYSTEM user.
password The SYS or SYSTEM password.
connection The Local Net Service Name for the ClearanceDB Oracle database.
logfile The name that you want to give the log file that is created when you run the
cre_ClearanceDB_user.sql script. For example, create_owner_log.txt.
owner The name you want to give the Oracle user account. For example,
CLOWNER.
password The password for the Oracle user account. For example, CLOWNER.
dflt_tablespace CL_TABLE. This is the name of the ClearanceDB tablespace.
temp_tablespace TEMP. This is the name of the area in the Oracle database for temp data.

Example:
sqlplus "sys/password@cldata AS SYSDBA" @cre_ClearanceDB_user.sql
ownerlog.txt CLOWNER CLOWNER CL_TABLE TEMP

Note:
The ClearanceDB SQL scripts are case-sensitive.

Tip:
If the user is successfully created, the contents of the log file will look like this:

old 1: CREATE USER "&2" IDENTIFIED BY "&3" DEFAULT TABLESPACE


"&4"
TEMPORARY TABLESPACE "&5" PROFILE DEFAULT
new 1: CREATE USER "CLOWNER" IDENTIFIED BY "CLOWNER" DEFAULT
TABLESPACE
"CL_TABLE" TEMPORARY TABLESPACE "TEMP" PROFILE DEFAULT

User created.

4-22 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Update Oracle user accounts

old 1: GRANT "CONNECT" TO "&2"


new 1: GRANT "CONNECT" TO "CLOWNER"

Grant succeeded.

old 1: GRANT "RESOURCE" TO "&2"


new 1: GRANT "RESOURCE" TO "CLOWNER"

Grant succeeded.

old 1: GRANT UNLIMITED TABLESPACE TO "&2"


new 1: GRANT UNLIMITED TABLESPACE TO "CLOWNER"

Grant succeeded.

old 1: GRANT CREATE TABLE TO "&2"


new 1: GRANT CREATE TABLE TO "CLOWNER"

Grant succeeded.

old 1: GRANT CREATE VIEW TO "&2"


new 1: GRANT CREATE VIEW TO "CLOWNER"

Grant succeeded.

old 1: GRANT EXECUTE ANY PROCEDURE TO "&2"


new 1: GRANT EXECUTE ANY PROCEDURE TO "CLOWNER"

Grant succeeded.

old 1: ALTER USER "&2" DEFAULT ROLE ALL


new 1: ALTER USER "CLOWNER" DEFAULT ROLE ALL

User altered.

Note:
You must now run the upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql script.

Update Oracle user accounts

After the creation of the ClearanceDB database, ClearanceDB Oracle user accounts must be updated
using the upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql script. You must also run this script whenever you want to update
to a newer version of ClearanceDB.

1. Open a command prompt and navigate to the ClearanceDB SQL scripts, which are located at the
following location within the stand-alone Lifecycle Visualization installation:

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-23


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

• <Mockup installation directory>\Products\Mockup\ClearanceDB\Server

2. At the command prompt, type

sqlplus "<owner>/<password>@<connection>" @upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql <logfile>


<dflt_tablespace> <index_tablespace>

where

For this parameter Type


owner The user name of the Oracle user account. For example, CLOWNER.
password The password for the Oracle user account. For example, CLOWNER.
connection The Local Net Service Name for the ClearanceDB Oracle database.
logfile The name that you want to give the log file that is created when you run the
upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql script. For example, updatelog.txt.
dflt_tablespace CL_TABLE. This is the name of a ClearanceDB tablespace.
indx_tablespace CL_INDEX. This is the name of a ClearanceDB tablespace.

Example:
sqlplus "clowner/clowner@cldata" @upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql updatelog.txt
CL_TABLE CL_INDEX

Note:
The ClearanceDB SQL scripts are case-sensitive.

Tip:
If the database is updated, the end of the log file will display a message similar to this:

On 2007/07/11 at 23:20:00 THE INSTALLATION SUCCEEDED.


PL/SQL procedure successfully completed.

Understanding roles

ClearanceDB roles allow the owner of a ClearanceDB database to grant or restrict access to specific
functions within the database. Roles can be associated with multiple users, and unique roles can be
combined into a "super" role to provide access to multiple areas of functionality.

To associate ClearanceDB users with roles, the following process must be followed:

4-24 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Understanding roles

1. Designate ClearanceDB users as auxiliary users with the cre_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql installation


script.

2. Assign roles to auxiliary users with the upd_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql installation script.

Once auxiliary users are created and associated with roles, use the upd_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql script
to revoke roles, and the del_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql script to delete auxiliary users.

The database administrator defines the Oracle user names during the user creation step of the
installation process. The DBA also creates the ClearanceDB auxiliary users. ClearanceDB roles may be
assigned to auxiliary users by the database administrator or the ClearanceDB database owner.

A ClearanceDB auxiliary user can be given access to a single ClearanceDB database only. The link
between an auxiliary user and a ClearanceDB database is established during the creation process of the
auxiliary users and cannot be modified. However, an auxiliary user can be deleted from a ClearanceDB
database and subsequently recreated with a link to a different database.

An auxiliary user cannot delete a ClearanceDB database nor change its grants. Objects such as tables
can be selectively viewed or modified only. Temporary objects can be created and deleted as needed but
only indirectly in an encapsulated way.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-25


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Roles

The database administrator or the owner of the ClearanceDB database can assign the following roles to
ClearanceDB auxiliary users.

Role Description
CONFIG This role allows auxiliary users to define and maintain the ClearanceDB process configuration
(per product) for all of the products in the database.
RULES This role allows auxiliary users to define and maintain ClearanceDB rules and conditions (per
product) for all of the products in the database.
ZONES This role allows auxiliary users to define and maintain the ClearanceDB process configuration
(per product and configurations) for all of the products and their configurations in the
database.
MAINT This role allows auxiliary users to maintain the ClearanceDB database in terms of its content.
In particular, the role supports product (metadata) reset in order to force a complete
reevaluation of the product, product data deletion, copy, and renaming tasks.
CALC This role allows auxiliary users to perform the incremental clearance analysis against the
ClearanceDB requirement rulebase either from Mockup or with the Clearance Calculator.
UPDATE This role allows auxiliary users to update the ClearanceDB database with clearance analysis
results.
ISSUES This role allows auxiliary users to query the ClearanceDB database for the clearance issues
associated with a given product and its configuration, with the analysis results possibly
subject to server side filtering. Also, ClearanceDB reports can be requested and history logs
queried.
CLDB This role combines all of the basic ClearanceDB roles. The privileges of the user granted the
role are still a very strict subset of the privileges of the owner of the schema. It consists of the
following basic roles: CONFIG, RULES, ZONES, MAINT, CALC, UPDATE, ISSUES.
ADMIN This role allows auxiliary users to administer the ClearanceDB process within the ClearanceDB
database. It consists of the following basic roles: CONFIG, RULES, ZONES, and MAINT.
VIS The role allows auxiliary users to perform clearance analysis, persist and manage issues
within a particular ClearanceDB environment. It consists of the following basic roles: CALC,
UPDATE, and ISSUES.

Note:
The above roles can be combined as needed to match the responsibilities of individual users.

4-26 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Create ClearanceDB auxiliary users

Create ClearanceDB auxiliary users

Execute the cre_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql script after the ClearanceDB Oracle user account and the
corresponding schema are created.

Usage (all on a single command line):

sqlplus <dba>/<password>@<connection> @cre_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql <logfile>


<AuxClearanceDBUserName> <AuxUserClearanceDBPassword> <DefaultTableSpaceName>
<TemporaryTableSpaceName> <ClearanceDBUserName>

where

Parameter Description
dba The user name of the SYS or SYSTEM user.
password The SYS or SYSTEM password.
connection The Local Net Service Name for the ClearanceDB Oracle database.
logfile The name that you want to give the log file that is created when
you run the cre_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql script. For example,
create_auxuser_log.txt.
AuxClearanceDBUserName The name that you want to use for the Oracle ClearanceDB auxiliary
user.
AuxUserClearanceDBPassword The password that you want to use for the Oracle ClearanceDB
auxiliary user.
DefaultTableSpaceName Oracle default tablespace name to be assigned to the ClearanceDB
auxiliary user (cannot be of temporary type). For example, USERS.
TemporaryTableSpaceName Oracle temporary tablespace name to be assigned to the
ClearanceDB auxiliary user (must be of temporary type). For
example, TEMP.
ClearanceDBUserName Oracle ClearanceDB Oracle user account name. For example,
CLOWNER.

Example:
sqlplus SYSTEM/MANAGER@ORCL @cre_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql
cre_vis_orcl.log
VIS VIS1234 USERS TEMP CLOWNER

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-27


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Note:
The ClearanceDB SQL scripts are case-sensitive.

Privileges

The auxiliary ClearanceDB user is granted the following system privileges at the time of creation: ALTER
SESSION CREATE SESSION CREATE SYNONYM UNLIMITED TABLESPACE

Synonyms

There are a number of synonyms created for the auxiliary ClearanceDB user at the time of creation.
The synonyms are not public. The synonyms are for the ClearanceDB schema owner objects. The set of
synonyms is the same for all ClearanceDB auxiliary users regardless of the roles that may be granted in
the future.

Example:
CREATE SYNONYM VIS.EAICL_RULE_BUFFER FOR CLOWNER.EAICL_RULE_BUFFER;

Managing User Roles

Execute the upd_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql script after the ClearanceDB auxiliary user is created.

Usage (all on a single command line):

sqlplus <owner>/<password>@<connection> @upd_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql <logfile>


<AuxClearanceDBUserName> vRoleAction> <RoleName>

where

Parameter Description
owner The user name of the Oracle user account. For example, CLOWNER.
password The password for the Oracle user account. For example, CLOWNER.
connection The Local Net Service Name for the ClearanceDB Oracle database.
logfile The name that you want to give the log file that is created
when you run the upd_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql script. For example,
updateauxlog.txt.
AuxClearanceDBUserName The Oracle ClearanceDB auxiliary user name.

4-28 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Create ClearanceDB auxiliary users

Parameter Description
RoleAction GRANT or REVOKE.
RoleName Any defined ClearanceDB role name. For example, VIS. If empty all roles
are revoked.

Example:
sqlplus CLOWNER/CLOW1234@ORCL @upd_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql
upd_vis_orcl1.log
VIS GRANT VIS

sqlplus CLOWNER/CLOW1234@ORCL @upd_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql


upd_vis_orcl2.log
VIS REVOKE

sqlplus CLOWNER/CLOW1234@ORCL @upd_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql


upd_vis_orcl3.log
VIS GRANT CLDB

Note:
The ClearanceDB SQL scripts are case-sensitive.

Deleting ClearanceDB Auxiliary Users

Execute the del_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql script after the ClearanceDB auxiliary user is created.

Usage (all on a single command line):

sqlplus <dba>/<password>@<connection> @del_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql <logfile>


<AuxClearanceDBUserName>

where

Parameter Description
dba The user name of the SYS or SYSTEM user.
password The SYS or SYSTEM password.
connection The Local Net Service Name for the ClearanceDB Oracle database.
logfile The name that you want to give the log file that is created when you run
the del_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql script. For example, delauxlog.txt.
AuxClearanceDBUserName Oracle ClearanceDB auxiliary user name. For example, VIS.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-29


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Example:
Sqlplus SYSTEM/MANAGER@ORCL @del_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql
del_vis_orcl.log VIS

Note:
The ClearanceDB SQL scripts are case-sensitive.

SQL script reference

Use the following scripts to manage the ClearanceDB database.

Note:
The ClearanceDB SQL scripts are case-sensitive.

Database management scripts

Use this script To do this


cre_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql Create auxiliary ClearanceDB users.
Usage:
sqlplus system/manager@connection
@cre_aux_ClearanceDB_user logfile user password
dflt_tablespace temp_tablespace owner
cre_ClearanceDB_user.sql Create ClearanceDB users.
Usage:
sqlplus system/manager@connection @cre_ClearanceDB_user
logfile user password dflt_tablespace temp_tablespace
del_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql Delete auxiliary ClearanceDB users.
Usage:
sqlplus system/manager@connection
@del_aux_ClearanceDB_user logfile user
upd_aux_ClearanceDB_user.sql Update auxiliary ClearanceDB users.
Usage:
sqlplus user/passwd@connection @upd_aux_ClearanceDB_user
logfile auxuser action role
upd_ClearanceDB_user.sql Update ClearanceDB users.

4-30 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
ClearanceDB Proxy overview

Use this script To do this


Usage:
sqlplus user/passwd@connection @upd_ClearanceDB_user logfile
dflt_tablespace indx_tablespace

Configuring the Proxy (expanded version)

ClearanceDB Proxy overview

ClearanceDB Proxy is essentially the “bridge” that connects the Clearance Calculator and
the viewer with the database. It consists of three applications, the ClearanceDbProxyServer,
ClearanceDbProxyHttpServer, and the ClearanceDbProxyClient. Only the ClearanceDbProxyServer and
ClearanceDbProxyHttpServer (optional) are started by the administrator; the ClearanceDbProxyClient is
invoked automatically.

ClearanceDB Proxy uses the Oracle Instant Client to connect to the ClearanceDB database on the Oracle
server. You can download the Instant Client from the downloads section of http://www.oracle.com.

Install the Oracle Instant Client (Windows)

ClearanceDB Proxy uses the Oracle Instant Client to connect to the ClearanceDB database on the Oracle
server.

For information about system hardware and software requirements, choose from links found in the
Hardware and Software Certifications knowledge base article on Support Center (scroll down to the
Teamcenter Visualization Software Certifications heading).

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-31


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

For supported platform requirements, see Supported platforms.

1. Open the Oracle Instant Client downloads page:

http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/database/features/instant-client/index-097480.html

Tip:
If the location of the downloads page changes and the above link no longer works, type
Instant Client Downloads in the search box in the upper right corner of the Oracle home
page.

2. From the list of available versions, choose the Instant Client for Windows 64-bit (x64).

3. After accepting the Oracle license agreement, download the Basic (not Basic Lite) package for your
platform.

4. When the download is complete, extract the installation files to a directory accessible to the
ClearanceDB software.

5. Confirm that a new directory containing the Instant Client files is created in the specified location.

6. Within the Instant Client directory, confirm that the file oci.dll exists.

7. In the ClearanceDB Work Area, open Clearance.cfgglobal with a text editor.

8. In the Section 2: ClearanceDB Proxy Configuration area of the file, for the OracleClientDirectory
setting, type the full path of the Instant Client subdirectory.

Example:
OracleClientDirectory=d:\apps\instantclient<version>

9. Save the file.

Install the Oracle Instant Client (Linux)

ClearanceDB Proxy uses the Oracle Instant Client to connect to the ClearanceDB database on the Oracle
server.

1. Open the Oracle Instant Client downloads page:

http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/database/features/instant-client/index-097480.html

4-32 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Install the Oracle Instant Client (Linux)

Tip:
If the location of the downloads page changes and the above link no longer works, type
Instant Client Downloads in the search box in the upper right corner of the Oracle home
page.

2. From the list of available versions, choose the Instant Client for Linux x86-64 or Instant Client for
Solaris Operating System (SPARC) (64-bit), as appropriate for your system.

3. After accepting the Oracle license agreement, download the Basic (not Basic Lite) package for your
platform. Choose version 11.2.0.3 (or newer 11.x.y version, if 11.2.0.3 is not available).

4. When the download is complete, extract the installation files to a directory accessible to the
ClearanceDB software.

5. Within the Instant Client directory, confirm the existence of the file libclntsh.so.11.1 with these
exact version numbers. Note at the time of this writing the library shows 11.1 even for 11.2
libraries.

Example:
$ cd /opt/instantclient_11_2
$ ls libclntsh.so.*
libclntsh.so.11.1*

6. If your version of libclntsh reflects a different (newer) version, for example, libclntsh.so.11.2, create
a symlink for libclntsh.so.11.1, as shown below. The first argument is the name of the library in
your installation.

Example:
ln –fs libclntsh.so.11.2 libclntsh.so.11.1

7. In the ClearanceDB Work Area, open Clearance.cfgglobal with a text editor.

8. In the Section 2: ClearanceDB Proxy Configuration area of the file, for the OracleClientDirectory
setting, type the full path of the Instant Client subdirectory.

Example:
OracleClientDirectory=/opt/instantclient_11_2

9. Save the file.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-33


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Configure the default ClearanceDB Proxy settings

Configure the global settings for the ClearanceDB Proxy in the Clearance.cfgglobal file. These settings
are used as defaults when you use the create_proxy.pl script to create a new instance of the proxy.

1. Install the ClearanceDB Proxy.

2. In the ClearanceDB Work Area, open Clearance.cfgglobal with a text editor.

3. Specify the following settings in the Section 2: ClearanceDB Proxy Configuration section of the file
to configure the proxy:

Note:
These global settings are used to populate the Clearance.cfgproxy file, which is created when
you use the create_proxy.pl script to create a new instance of the proxy. If necessary, you can
adjust the settings in Clearance.cfgproxy to override the global defaults.

OracleClientDirectory
Specifies the full directory path containing the Oracle Instant Client files. For
example, OracleClientDirectory=c:\apps\instantclient_x_y or OracleClientDirectory=/opt/
instantclient_x_y.
LogFile
Specifies the name of the file where ClearanceDB Proxy messages are logged.
Compress
Specifies whether or not the communications between the ClearanceDB client applications and
the ClearanceDB Proxy are compressed. Compression results in higher performance. Choose
one of the following:

True — Compress ClearanceDB Proxy messages.

False — Do not compress ClearanceDB Proxy messages.


Port
Specifies the port number for ClearanceDB Proxy to use, along with the number of threads that
you want to listen to the port. For example, 7206,8.

Note:
You can specify multiple port numbers like this:

port1,number of threads
port2,number of threads

4-34 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Configure the default ClearanceDB Proxy settings

ProxyClientPassword
Specifies an optional password for ClearanceDB Proxy.

Note:
If you require a password for clients to access the database, it must be specified in the
DBC file like this:
DATASOURCE=<proxy_name>,<port>/<password>

CONNECT_DATA
Specifies the Oracle connection information. Type the information according to the following
syntax:

<connect_name>,<user>/<password>@<service_name>

Note:
The value used for <connect_name> must match the value specified in the DBC file.

If you are using an encrypted password in an external file, type the information according to
the following syntax:

<connect_name>,<user>@<service_name>

Use the ClearanceDBUserPasswordFile setting to specify the full path and file name for the
file containing the encrypted Oracle user password.
ClearanceDBUserPasswordFile
Specifies the path to a file containing the Oracle user password.
AdminProxyPassword
Specifies an optional password used to stop a ClearanceDB Proxy via ClearanceDB Client. This
password should be restricted to the proxy administrator only.
STANDARD_PROXY
This is an optional setting. The default communication between the ClearanceDB client
applications and the ClearanceDB Proxy uses TCP/IP protocol. Choose one of the following:

True — Scripts use the default TCP/IP-based communication protocol.

False — Set to false for the scripts to only execute HTTP flow.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-35


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Note:
If this setting is not defined, the default TCP/IP protocol is used.

4. Specify the following settings in the Section 5: ClearanceDB HTTP Proxy Configuration section of
the file to configure the Http proxy:

Note:
These settings are required to use HTTP/S-based communication protocol between the client
and Clearance database server. SSO setup is prerequisite to enabling this feature.
For more information on setting up the SSO environment, see Security Services Installation/
Customization in Security Services Configuration.

WEB_SERVICE
Specifies whether the communication between the ClearanceDB client applications and the
ClearanceDB Proxy uses the HTTP protocol. Choose one of the following:

True — HTTP-based communication protocol.

False — This feature is not enabled.


WEB_SERVICE_DISPLAY_NAME
Specifies the display name for the web service.
WEB_SERVICE_DESCRIPTION
Specifies the description for the web service.
PROXY_SERVER
Specifies the ClearanceDB Proxy Server that will communicate with the Oracle Database.
PROXY_SERVER_PORT
Specifies the port number for the ClearanceDB Proxy Server to use.
WEB_SERVICE_PROXY
Specifies the web service URL where the ClearanceDB HTTP Proxy is running.
WEB_SERVICE_PORT
Specifies the port number for the ClearanceDB HTTP Proxy Server to use
SSO_SERVICE_IDENTITY_URL
Specifies the URL used by the TcSS solution for single sign-on. For
example, SSO_SERVICE_IDENTITY_URL=https://myserver.com/TcClearanceIdentity where
TcClearanceIdentity is the TcSS identity provider name defined by Teamcenter Web Application
Manager.

4-36 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
ClearanceDB Proxy HTTP Server overview

CLEARANCE_APPID
Specifies the application id defined in the TcSS Application Registry. For example,
CLEARANCE_APPID=TcClearanceDB.
WEB_SERVICE_URL
Specifies the HTTP or HTTPS web service URL used by ClearanceDB. The URL should point to
a reverse proxy, which will redirect the request to the ClearanceDB Http proxy server running
behind the firewall. For example, WEB_SERVICE_URL=https://myserver.com/TcVisCLDB.

Note:
You must specify this value to stop remote proxy if you are using cfgproxy file as an input.

5. Save the Clearance.cfgglobal file.

Configure the ClearanceDB HTTP Server

ClearanceDB Proxy HTTP Server overview

ClearanceDbProxyHttpServer.exe is a web service executable which is added to the Teamcenter lifecycle


visualization ClearanceDB solution to support HTTP/S-based communication between Teamcenter
visualization clients and the Clearance database.

ClearanceDbProxyHttpServer.exe relies on TcSS (Teamcenter Security Services) to provide SSO (single


sign-on) and user authentication.

To enable the ClearanceDbProxyHttpServer.exe feature, set up the following components.

• Set up the Apache web server

• Install SSL certificates

• Extract the required key/certificate information

• Import certificates into the client machine

• Export certificates as a .pfx

• Import the certificate into the Java Virtual Machine certificate trust store

• Set up the Teamcenter Web Application Manager

• Configure Teamcenter for ClearanceDB Http Server

• Configure secure mode service (optional)

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-37


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

• Configure the proxy and database connection

• Configure the ClearanceDB PERL scripts

Set up the Apache web server

Configure the ClearanceDB Proxy HTTP Server (HTTP Proxy / Web Service) to run behind an Apache
reverse proxy.

1. Download the Apache HTTP server.

2. Configure SSL (secure sockets layer) information in either the http-vhosts.conf file or the httpd-
ssl.conf file.

3. Set the SSL attributes ProxyPass and ProxyReversePass in the Apache config files.

Example:
SSLEngine on
SSLCertificateFile ${SRVROOT}/key/certificate.crt
SSLCertificateKeyFile ${SRVROOT}/key/decrypted.key
ProxyPass "/TcVisCLDB" "http://myclearanceserver.com:9090/TcVisCLDB"
ProxyPassReverse "/TcVisCLDB" "http://myclearanceserver.com:9090/TcVisCLDB"

Refer to the Apache documentation for more information on the correct syntax to configure the reverse
proxy.

Installing SSL certificates

Extract the required key/certificate information

The Apache Web Server requires certificate authentication as part of the secure communication protocol
between the client and server. Install the certificate on both the client and server. Ensure the certificate
is generated and signed by a trusted source.

OpenSSL can be installed to extract relevant information from the certificates. The private key and the
public certificate can be extracted from the generated certificate (usually a pfx file).

Following are the commands to extract the required information.

Private key

Use the following command to extract the private key:

4-38 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Import certificates into the client machine

openssl pkcs12 -in [yourfile.pfx] -nocerts -out [keyfile-encrypted.key]

The system will ask for the import password for the .pfx certificate file. This is the same password that
was used to protect the keypair when the .pfx file was first created.

When the import password is entered OpenSSL requests a new password, twice. This new password
protects the extracted private .key file.

Public certificate

Use the following command to generate the public certificate:

openssl pkcs12 -in [yourfile.pfx] -clcerts -nokeys -out [certificate.crt]

Uncrypted key

Use the following command to extract the encrypted key:

openssl rsa -in [keyfile-encrypted.key] -out [keyfile-decrypted.key]

The password is the same password used to protect the private key pair.

PEM formats

You may be required to convert the keys/certificates to PEM format. PEM format keys are required to run
the ClearanceDB Proxy HTTP Server in secure mode (currently only supported on Windows without using
an Apache reverse proxy configuration).

Use the following command to convert the keys/s=certificates to PEM format:

openssl rsa -in [keyfile-encrypted.key] -outform PEM -out [keyfile-


encrypted-pem.key].

openssl pkcs12 -in [yourfile.pfx] -out [certificate.pem]

For more information on converting certificates to appropriate formats, refer to the openssl
documentation (https://www.openssl.org/).

Import certificates into the client machine

Use the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) to import the certificates on Windows.

1. Start the MMC (Start→Run→MMC).

2. Choose File→Add/Remove Snap In.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-39


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

3. In the Snap-In window, double-click Certificates.

4. Select Computer Account.

5. Select Local Computer→Finish.

6. Click OK to exit the Snap-In window.

7. Click + next to Certificates→Personal→Certificates.

8. Right-click Certificates and select All Tasks→Import.

9. Click Next.

10. Click Browse.

11. Select the .cer, .crt, or .pfx you want to import, and then click Open.

12. Click Next.

13. Select Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate.

14. Click Finish and then OK.

Export certificates as a .pfx

Use the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) to export certificates.

1. Start the MMC (Start→Run→MMC).

2. Choose File→Add/Remove Snap In.

3. In the Snap-In window, double-click Certificates.

4. Select Computer Account.

5. Select Local Computer→Finish.

6. Click OK to exit the Snap-In window.

7. Click + next to Certificates→Personal→Certificates.

8. Right-click the certificate for the domain and select All Tasks→Export.

9. Click Next.

4-40 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Import the certificate into the Java virtual machine certificate trust store

10. Click Yes, export the private key.

11. Do the following.

a. Select Personal Information Exchange - PKCS#12 (.PFX) as the certificate file format.

b. Select Include all certificates in the certificate path if possible.

c. Select Export all extended properties.

d. Click Next.

12. Enter a password for your private key and then click Next.

13. Click Save to save your .pfx.

14. Click Next, then click Finish.

15. Click OK.

Import the certificate into the Java virtual machine certificate trust store

Since SSO client relies on certificate validation, the certificate must be imported into the client JVM so
that it can be validated by reverse proxy.

1. Check the JAVA_HOME environment variable to determine the Java version used by the system.

2. At a command prompt, enter the following, where server_name is the web server and the
public.crt is the public certificate for the web service.

<JAVA_HOME>/bin/keytool -import -alias <server_name> -keystore


<JAVA_HOME>/jre/lib/security/cacerts -file public.crt

Certificates and Linux

Teamcenter visualization maintains its own certificate store on Linux. Any new certificate needs to be
copied over to the <Install>/Visualization/etc/certs folder.

Certificates and Mozilla/Firefox

Mozilla/Firefox clients manage certificates differently. The certificates can be imported through
Preferences→ Advanced→Certificates (Certificate Manager).

Set up Teamcenter Web Application Manager

Apache Tomcat must be installed prior to setting up Web Application Manager.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-41


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Web Application Manager is a JAVA-based application that deploys its WAR files in Tomcat. This
application consists of the Identify provider and Login provider.

For detailed instructions on setting up the Web Application Manager, see Security Services Installation/
Customization in Security Services Configuration.

Configure Teamcenter for ClearanceDB HTTP Server

It is best practice to use the Teamcenter SSO (single sign-on) setup in conjunction with Teamcenter
Web Application Manager. This will enable SSO authentication against the Teamcenter user base via the
CLEARANCE_APPID property defined in the Clearance.cfgproxy file. The value can be set to Teamcenter,
or equivalent, for authentication against the Teamcenter user base. If authentication is required against
a different LDAP, this information should be configured in Teamcenter Web Application Manager Login
Service.

ApacheDS (Apache directory studio) can be installed to work as an LDAP for testing.

For more information on configuring ApacheDS to work with TcSS (Teamcenter Security Services), see
Security Services Configuration in the Teamcenter help.

Configure secure mode service

The ClearanceDB Proxy HTTP Server can also work as a forward proxy, as well as a reverse proxy. The
communication protocol as a forward proxy can be secure or unsecure.

SSO (single sign-on) is a prerequisite for both deployment modes to perform authentication. The
property WEB_SERVICE_URL, defined in *.dbc file, determines the communication protocol.

Mode Value Description


Reverse Proxy WEB_SERVICE_URL=https:// The client communicates to the Apache reverse proxy,
myserver.com /TcVisCLDB while the ClearanceDB Proxy HTTP Server runs behind
this proxy. This is the recommended usage.
Forward Proxy WEB_SERVICE_URL=http:// The client communicates directly with the
- unsecure myserver.com:9090/TcVisCLDB ClearanceDB Proxy HTTP Server in unsecured mode
using the HTTP protocol.
Forward Proxy WEB_SERVICE_URL=https:// The client communicates directly with the
-secure myserver.com:443/TcVisCLDB ClearanceDB Proxy HTTP Server in secured mode and
uses certificate validation.
Currently, only the certificate issuer name between
the client and server is validated.

Using the ClearanceDB Proxy HTTP Server in forward proxy secure mode requires the following
additional setup.

4-42 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Configure the proxy and database connection

• For both the server and client, set the environment variable
TCVIS_PC_ENABLE_CLIENT_CERTIFICATE_SUPPORT=True

• Do the following.

• Define the ClearanceDbProxyHttpServer.properties properties file.

• Copy the properties file into the same location as the server executable.

• Add the certificates to the same location, or give a complete path to the certificate location.

Example:
openSSL.server.privateKeyFile = private_key.pem
openSSL.server.certificateFile = public_cert.pem
openSSL.server.verificationMode = relaxed
openSSL.server.verificationDepth = 9
openSSL.server.loadDefaultCAFile = true
openSSL.server.cipherList = ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH
openSSL.server.privateKeyPassphraseHandler.name = KeyFileHandler
openSSL.server.privateKeyPassphraseHandler.options.password = securePassword
openSSL.server.invalidCertificateHandler.name = AcceptCertificateHandler
openSSL.server.extendedVerification = false
openSSL.server.cacheSessions = true
openSSL.server.sessionIdContext = ClearanceDbProxyHttpServer
openSSL.server.sessionCacheSize = 100
openSSL.server.requireTLSv1 = false

Refer to the OpenSSL documentation for details on the property values.

Configure the proxy and database connection

Use the options in the Clearance.cfgglobal and global.dbc files to configure


ClearanceDbProxyHttpServer.exe. These options control SSO authentication and the communication
protocol for ClearanceDB.

For more details on using these options, see the Clearance.cfgglobal and global.dbc files found in
<Install Path>Visualization\Program\ClearanceDB\Support\Work_Area_Template.

Configure the ClearanceDB PERL scripts

Do the following to define the PERL scripts:

• Define the following settings in the .dbc and. cfgproxy files to control communication between the
Teamcenter Visualization client and server.

• WEB_SERVICE=true, communication protocol for ClearanceDB will be HTTP.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-43


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

• WEB_SERVICE=false, communication protocol for ClearanceDB will be TCP/IP.


• STANDARD_PROXY=true, used to start/stop/ping only the TCP/IP proxy.

• It is best practice to create a .dbc file with the relevant connection information so that the
communication with ClearanceDB uses the secured HTTP communication protocol while using these
scripts. The following scripts have command line arguments which are used to create a local .dbc file
used for TCP/IP communication.

• create_product.pl
• list_all_products.pl
• ping_database.pl
• ping_proxy.pl
• stop_proxy.pl

• So that the settings from the proxy are used for communication, set UploadMethod=Proxy in the
Clearance.cfgglobal file. Some scripts, like update_product.pl, rely on these settings. For more
details, see Updating products in the database.

Encrypt the Oracle user password

You can use the Teamcenter install utility to encrypt the Oracle user password. The encrypted password
is stored in an external file.

1. In an environment configured to run Teamcenter utilities, open a command prompt.

For information about configuring an environment to run Teamcenter utilities, see Manually
configure your environment in the Teamcenter Utilities.

2. At the command prompt, type:

install –encryptpwf –f=<path>

where

path is the full path and file name for the password file that you want to generate.

Example:
install –encryptpwf –f=C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\oracle_key

The install utility displays the following message:

Please enter password:

3. Type the password and press Enter.

4-44 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Create a ClearanceDB Proxy

The utility displays the following message:

Please re-enter the password:

4. Type the password again and press Enter.

The password is encrypted and saved to the specified location.

5. Navigate to the ClearanceDB Work Area.

6. Open the Clearance.cfgglobal file or a Clearance.cfgproxy file in a text editor.

7. To specify for ClearanceDB to obtain the Oracle user password from the encrypted password file,
locate the ClearanceDBUserPasswordFile setting, and type the full path and file name for the
password file.

Example:
ClearanceDBUserPasswordFile=C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\oracle_key

8. Save the file.

Create a ClearanceDB Proxy

Use the create_proxy.pl script to create a ClearanceDB Proxy.

1. Open a command prompt and navigate to the ClearanceDB Work Area.

2. From the command prompt, type:

create_proxy.pl <proxy_name>

A folder named after the new proxy is created in the Proxies directory. This directory contains a file
called Clearance.cfgproxy, which includes the default proxy settings from the Clearance.cfgglobal
file.

Configure a ClearanceDB Proxy

When you use the create_proxy.pl script to create a ClearanceDB Proxy, a directory for the proxy is
created within the ClearanceDB Work Area. This directory contains a file called Clearance.cfgproxy,
which is populated with the default proxy settings from the Clearance.cfgglobal file.

If necessary, you can adjust the settings in Clearance.cfgproxy to override the global defaults. You can
also add additional entries from the Clearance.cfgglobal file if you want to modify them for your proxy.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-45


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

1. In the Proxies directory within the ClearanceDB Work Area, navigate to the proxy folder, and then
open the Clearance.cfgproxy file in a text editor.

2. Modify the StartupType setting to control how the proxy starts, including the ClearanceDB HTTP
Proxy. Choose from the following options:
Automatic
Specifies to start the proxy using a Windows service that automatically starts when the system
boots.
Manual
Specifies to start the proxy using a Windows service that you can manually start from the proxy
directory or from the Windows Service monitor.
Console
Specifies to manually run the process, without using a Windows service, from the proxy
directory or from the Windows command prompt.

Warning:
If you want to run the proxy as a Windows service, do not modify the LogFile setting, which
requires an absolute path for the service to function correctly.

3. If you want to verify the software environment when starting the proxy, set the
VerifyEnvironment parameter to True.

Note:
The versions used for the operating system and the ClearanceDB Proxy should all have the
same bit architecture (32-bit or 64-bit).

4. If you want to adjust the maximum size of the dynamic buffer used for the
compression of data sent between ClearanceDB Proxy and ClearanceDB clients, set the
MaximumLargeMessageBufferSize parameter to any value from 1 to 256.

The value used to specify the buffer size is in mebibytes, The default value is 128 mebibytes, which
is approximately 134 megabytes (1 mebibyte equals approximately 1.048 megabytes).

5. If you want to include additional sections in the ClearanceDB Proxy log file, add the LogFlags entry.

Warning:
Adding these sections may significantly affect system performance, especially if you add the
SOCKETS section.

You can add these sections:

4-46 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Run a ClearanceDB Proxy as a Windows service

• SESSIONS — Obtaining and releasing of Oracle sessions. If LogFlags is not included in the
Clearance.cfgproxy file, the SESSIONS section is included in the log file by default. To exclude
this section, the LogFlags entry must be included in the Clearance.cfgproxy file without
SESSIONS being listed.

• SQL — Calls from the proxy to the Oracle RDBMS.

• PACKETS — Socket packet receive and send events.

• SOCKETS — Events related to socket acceptances and closures by proxy worker threads.

Note:
Due to the size of this section, it is recommended that you only include it if SESSIONS,
SQL, and PACKETS are not included.

To include one section, specify it as follows:

Example:
LogFlags=SESSIONS

To include multiple sections, separate them with a +, as follows:

Note:
LogFlags=SESSIONS+SQL+PACKETS

6. Save the Clearance.cfgproxy file.

Run a ClearanceDB Proxy as a Windows service

On Windows, you can run the ClearanceDB Proxy as a Windows service.

1. In the Proxies directory within the ClearanceDB Work Area, navigate to the folder of the proxy that
you want to manage with a service, and then open the Clearance.cfgproxy file in a text editor.

Warning:
Do not modify the LogFile setting, which requires an absolute path for the service to
function correctly.

2. Modify the StartupType setting to specify how the service starts. Choose one of the following
options:
Automatic

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-47


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Specifies to start the proxy using a Windows service that automatically starts when the system
boots.
Manual
Specifies to start the proxy using a Windows service that you can manually start from the proxy
directory or from the Windows Service monitor.

3. Save the Clearance.cfgproxy file.

4. Right-click the Clearance.cfgproxy file and choose Start Proxy.

When the proxy starts for the first time, the service is created.

5. Reboot the system.

Note:
If the StartupType option in the Clearance.cfgproxy file is set to Automatic, the service starts
automatically.

6. Do any of the following:

To Do this
Start the service from Right-click the Clearance.cfgproxy file and choose Start Proxy.
the proxy directory
Start the service from Type:
the command line
sc start <service name>

Note:
You must provide the service name not the display name of the
service. To display a list of the services on your machine, type: sc
query state= all. Scroll through the list until you find the entry
for the ClearanceDB Proxy service, which includes the service
name.

Tip:
For descriptions of all of the commands supported by the SC
program, type sc.

Start the service from a. Open Administrative Tools and then Services.
the Control Panel

4-48 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Start a ClearanceDB Proxy

To Do this
b. In the Services list, right-click the ClearanceDB Proxy service and
choose Start.
Stop the service from Right-click the Clearance.cfgproxy file and choose Stop Proxy.
the proxy directory
Stop the service from Type:
the command line
sc stop <service name>
Stop the service from a. Open Administrative Tools and then Services.
the Control Panel
b. In the Services list, right-click the ClearanceDB Proxy service and
choose Stop.
Delete the proxy service In the proxy directory, right-click the Clearance.cfgproxy file and
choose Remove Proxy from Services.

Note:
If WEB_SERVICE=True, the same commands and behavior are applicable to the ClearanceDB
HTTP Proxy. If STANDARD_PROXY=False, the scripts will execute only the HTTP flow.

Start a ClearanceDB Proxy

You can start a ClearanceDB Proxy from the command prompt. On Windows, you can also start the proxy
with a right-click shortcut associated with the Clearance.cfgproxy file.

1. In the Proxies directory within the ClearanceDB Work Area, navigate to the folder of the proxy that
you want to start, and then open the Clearance.cfgproxy file in a text editor.

2. Ensure the StartupType option is set to Console.

3. Save the Clearance.cfgproxy file.

4. Do either of the following:

To start the proxy Do this


(Windows) From the Right-click the Clearance.cfgproxy file and choose Start Proxy.
shortcut menu
From the command Type
prompt
start_proxy.pl <path_to_proxy_directory>\ clearance.cfgproxy

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-49


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

To start the proxy Do this

Example:
start_proxy.pl C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\ Proxies\Proxy1\
clearance.cfgproxy

If the proxy is able to connect to the specified database, the command prompt message will
resemble the following:

Successfully connected to Oracle service [CLDB] using connect_data [CLDB].

If WEB_SERVICE=True, then the script will start the ClearanceDB HTTP Proxy. The system
will display an additional message, Clearance Web Service started and running. Type http://
[WEB_SERVICE_PROXY]: [WEB_SERVICE_PORT] to use it or type CRLT+C to finish it.

Ping a ClearanceDB Proxy

You can ping a ClearanceDB Proxy to determine if the proxy is functioning normally.

Do any of the following:

To ping the proxy Do this


(Windows) From the Right-click a DBC file that references the proxy and choose Ping Proxy.
shortcut menu
From the command Type
prompt
ping_proxy.pl <path_to_DBC_file>\<DBC_file>

Example:
ping_proxy.pl C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\ global.dbc
ping_proxy.pl C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\
Proxies\Proxy1\proxy1.dbc

Note:
If WEB_SERVICE=True, the script will ping the HTTP proxy. The system will display an additional
message, Successfully connected to the http proxy at https:// [ WEB_SERVICE_URL].

Ping the database

You can ping the ClearanceDB database to test the database connectivity.

4-50 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
List products in the database

From the ClearanceDB Work Area, do any of the following:

To ping the database Do this


(Windows) From the Right-click a DBC file and choose Ping Database.
shortcut menu
From the command prompt Type
ping_database.pl <path_to_DBC_file>\<DBC_file>

Example:
ping_database.pl C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\ global.dbc
ping_database.pl C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\
Proxies\Proxy1\proxy1.dbc

List products in the database

You can display a list of the ClearanceDB products that exist in the database.

From the ClearanceDB Work Area, do any of the following:

To list products in the Do this


database
(Windows) From the shortcut Right-click a DBC file and choose List All Products.
menu
From the command prompt Type
list_all_products.pl <path_to_DBC_file>\<DBC_file>

Example:
list_all_products.pl C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\ global.dbc
list_all_products.pl C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\
Proxies\Proxy1\proxy1.dbc

Stop a ClearanceDB Proxy

You can stop a ClearanceDB Proxy from the command prompt. On Windows, you can also stop the proxy
with a right-click shortcut associated with the Clearance.cfgproxy file.

1. From the ClearanceDB Work Area, do any of the following:

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-51


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

To stop the proxy Do this


(Windows) From the shortcut menu Right-click the Clearance.cfgproxy file and
choose Stop Proxy.
From the command prompt Type
stop_proxy.pl <path_to_proxy_directory>\
<proxy_configuration_file>

Example:
stop_proxy.pl
C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\
Proxies\Proxy1\ clearance.cfgproxy

The command line output displays the following message:

This command will stop the proxy.


Are you sure (y/n)?

2. Type y and press Enter.

The proxy stops.

Note:
If WEB_SERVICE=True, the script will stop the HTTP proxy.

Configuring the Client and Clearance Calculator (expanded version)

Setting up the work area

The ClearanceDB Work Area is the location on your machine where you can create and manage
ClearanceDB products. Created by the create_ClearanceDB_working_dir.pl script, the ClearanceDB Work
Area contains configuration files that you use to create a connection with the database, run the proxy,
and update the database with product information such as rules, conditions, zones, and results.

Note:
To administer ClearanceDB, you must create and work from a ClearanceDB Work Area.

4-52 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Setting up the work area

Global configuration files are located in the root of the work area

Each of your products and proxies is located in a separate directory

Product-specific configuration files are located in each product directory

A proxy-specific configuration file is located in each proxy directory

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-53


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Create the ClearanceDB Work Area

When working with the Clearance Calculator, ClearanceDB Client, and ClearanceDB Proxy, you must
create a specific ClearanceDB Work Area on your machine, from which you can create and manage
ClearanceDB products and instances of the ClearanceDB Proxy.

1. Install the Clearance Calculator, ClearanceDB Client, or ClearanceDB Proxy.

2. Open a command prompt and type

create_ClearanceDB_working_dir.pl <path> [-df]

where

For this
parameter Type
path The path to the location on your machine where you want to create the work
area.

Note:
The path parameter is used to specify the location of the work area, not the
name of the work area, which is always ClearanceDB_Work_Area.

-df The option to populate the work area with a default product.

Note:
The ClearanceDB Work Area must have a default product, which is used for
the creation of new products. You can create the default product now, or
run the create_default_product.pl script to create it later.

Example:
create_ClearanceDB_working_dir.pl c:\ -df

A new directory named ClearanceDB_Work_Area is created at the specified location.

Global configuration options

The ClearanceDB global configuration file (Clearance.cfgglobal), located in the root of the ClearanceDB
Work Area, controls the default settings for the ClearanceDB Proxy, ClearanceDB Client, and Clearance
Calculator. The settings from this file are applied to all of the clearance products in the ClearanceDB Work

4-54 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Global configuration options

Area, unless the settings are manually copied into the Clearance.cfgproduct for a specific product. Any
settings specified in the Clearance.cfgproduct take precedence over the Clearance.cfgglobal file.

Section 1: Teamcenter Configuration

TC_ROOT
Specifies the Teamcenter root directory.
TC_DATA
Specifies the Teamcenter TC_DATA directory.
TeamcenterUserId
Specifies a Teamcenter user name with Teamcenter system administration privileges. If no user
name is provided, ClearanceDB uses the operating system user name.

Note:
This is the same option as the bomwriter -u= command line argument.

TeamcenterUserPassword
This setting is deprecated. The Teamcenter user password is now stored in a separate file, and the
path to the file is specified with the TeamcenterUserPasswordFile setting. Now if the password
is specified with TeamcenterUserPassword, it is written to an unencrypted file in the user’s home
directory with a randomly generated name beginning with CLDB.
TeamcenterUserPasswordFile
Specifies the path to a file containing the Teamcenter user password.

Note:
This is the same option as the bomwriter -pf= command line argument.

TeamcenterUserGroupId
Specifies the Teamcenter group ID. If no group ID is provided, ClearanceDB uses the default group of
the specified Teamcenter user.

Note:
This is the same option as the bomwriter -g= command line argument.

RevisionRule
Specifies the revision rule for the product's top level product structure node.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-55


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Note:
This is the same option as the bomwriter -revision_rule= command line argument.

SavedVariantRule
Specifies the saved variant configuration to pass to the BOMwriter.
LexicographicalVariantAnalysis
Defines the mode of the evaluation of variant condition relational expressions. Choose one of the
following:

No — If indeterminable variant conditions exist, the affected variant inferences are asked from the
server. This is the default.

Yes — If indeterminable variant conditions exist, evaluate them lexicographically.

Note:
Variant conditions that cannot be evaluated based on textual representations are
indeterminable.

VariantAnalysisClientTraceFile
Specifies the name for the log file of the variant analysis. By default, this is not set, and a log file is
not generated.

Example:
VariantAnalysisClientTraceFile=cldb_variant_analysis.log

VariantAnalysisClientTraceFlags
Specified the content of the log file of the variant analysis. The trace flags are additive, concatenated
with the plus (+) character.

Example:
VariantAnalysisClientTraceFlags=CONFIGURATION+STATISTICS

Add any of the following flags:

CONFIGURATION Lists the variant analysis configuration attributes.


STATISTICS Provides the basic variant analysis statistics.
VARIANTCONDITIONS Provides details of textual variant conditions.
DETERMINABILITY Lists the determinability of variant conditions.

4-56 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Global configuration options

SATISFIABILITY Lists the satisfiability of variant conditions.


EXCLUDEDVCPAIRS Lists excluded variant condition pairs.
EXCUDEDUIDPAIRS Lists excluded clearance element pairs as ABSOCCs.
EXCLUDEDNGIDPAIRS Lists excluded clearance element pairs as NGIDs.
IMPACT Lists the impact of variant conditions on the product structure.

Caution:
Enabling the EXCUDEDUIDPAIRS and EXCLUDEDNGIDPAIRS trace flags may result in
extremely large log files.

VariantLogicalExpression
Defines the variant condition UserValue title and BOM line property pair in the .plmxml file. This has
the form of:

“Variant Condition”:bl_variant_condition

“Variant Formula”:bl_formula

Example:
VariantLogicalExpression="VC:bl_variant_condition"

Note:
This must match the content of the BomWriterUserAttributes setting.

RunLevel
Specifies the actions of the analyze_managed_product.pl script. Use a value from 1 to 6.

1 — In the product directory, a .vvi file is created, which is used by the BOMwriter to generate
a .plmxml file referencing the managed data.
2 — Using the .vvi and .plmxml files in the product directory, the Clearance Calculator performs
analysis upon the managed product data and generates a results file.
3 — The results file is uploaded to the ClearanceDB database.
4 — Both the RunLevel 1 and 2 actions are performed.
5 — Both the RunLevel 2 and 3 actions are performed.
6 — All of the RunLevel actions are performed, 1, 2, and 3.
BomWriterUserAttributes
Specifies the variant conditions for the BOMwriter to include in the generated .plmxml file. Type
these according to the following syntax:

target:Instance,key:myAttribute,literal:"My Attribute Value"

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-57


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Note:
This is the same option as the bomwriter -ua= command line argument.

Example:
Use this option to include variant model related BOM line properties in the generated .plmxml
file. For example:
BomWriterUserAttributes=target:Instance,key: VC,prop: bl_variant_condition

TeamcenterWebServerPath
Specifies the Teamcenter web server path, including the protocol, host name, and port number.
Type this according to the following syntax:

TeamcenterWebServerPath=http://machine_name:port

Example:
TeamcenterWebServerPath=http://tcserver:80/tc8_2008/

JtDataStagingProcess
Specifies to use the Teamcenter load_fcccache utility to download the model data from the
Teamcenter server to the local system for clearance analysis. Enabling this option pre-populates
the FMS client cache (FCC), which leads to faster and more reliable analysis.

Valid values are 0 (off) or 1 (on). The default value is 0.


JtDataStagingProcessErrorLimit
Specifies when to abort the analyze_managed_product.pl script, based on the following custom
error codes:

FILECOPY_FAILED
INVALID_DAKID_FORMAT
FCC_OPENFILE_FAILED
FCC_DOWNLOAD_FAILED
GET_READ_TICKET_FAILED
DATASET_READ_FAILED
PLMXML_MISSING_JT
CHMOD_FAILED
COPYOUT_CLEANUP_FAILED

You can specify a numerical value for each error code. By default, the error codes are given values
that correspond to the severity of the problem, with the lowest value representing the most severe
failure. If a value is not specified for the JtDataStagingProcessErrorLimit setting, the script stops
whenever an error occurs during the staging process.

4-58 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Global configuration options

The default value is 30.

Note:
The default values are recommended for the JtDataStagingProcessErrorLimit setting and the
related error codes. Essentially, with these defaults the clearance analysis will abort when
any of these errors occur, and you can use the reported error message to troubleshoot the
problem.

FILECOPY_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a copy operation to the output directory has failed.

The default value is 20.


INVALID_DAKID_FORMAT
Specifies the error code that indicates an invalid DAKID was found.

The default value is 21.


FCC_OPENFILE_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates the FCC failed to open the file using the ticket.

The default value is 22.


FCC_DOWNLOAD_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a failure most likely due to a missing file in the volume.

The default value is 23.


GET_READ_TICKET_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a read ticket failed.

The default value is 24.


DATASET_READ_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates no read access on the dataset.

The default value is 25.


PLMXML_MISSING_JT
Specifies the error code that indicates a missing JT file reference in the .plmxml file.

The default value is 26.


CHMOD_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a failure to set the access mode during copy out.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-59


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

The default value is 27.


COPYOUT_CLEANUP_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a failure to remove a file during lifetime cleanup.

The default value is 28.


CopyOutLocation
Specifies the location for the dataset files downloaded from Teamcenter server.

The default location is the product directory in the ClearanceDB Work Area.

Note:
Do not use special characters in folder names.

BucketCount
Specifies how many directories to use for the cached files. Spreading the files over multiple
directories can lead to better performance.

The default value is 30.


UseAbsoluteLocation
Specifies to use an absolute value for the location attribute in the .plmxml file generated by the
BOMwriter. It is usually better to have a relative reference, although there are instances where an
absolute reference is required, such as when the .plmxml file is moved to a different location from
the referenced files.

The default value is No.

BucketPrefix
Specifies a prefix to add to the names of directories created to hold the cached files.

The default value is RW.


FilenamePrefix
Specifies a prefix to add to the names of the cached files.

The default value is fmsr_.


CopyOutLifetime
Specifies the lifetime of the files cached in the StagingProcessDownloads directory. The directory is
scanned for files older than the specified value, which are removed. The lifetime value is specified in
seconds, where one day is equal to 86400 seconds and two weeks is equal to 1209600 seconds.

4-60 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Global configuration options

The default value is 1209600 (two weeks).

Note:
This option requires the FilenamePrefix option to be set since it uses the prefix as validation
of ownership to prevent the accidental removal of files.

LifetimeCheck
Specifies to scan the StagingProcessDownloads directory for files older than the CopyOutLifetime
value.

Valid values are 0 (off) or 1 (on). The default value is 0.


LifetimeCheckInterval
Specifies how often to scan the StagingProcessDownloads directory for files older than the
CopyOutLifetime value. If the directory holds many files and it is not important to check the
lifetime each time the analyze_managed_product.pl script is run, you can improve performance by
increasing the value so the check is made less frequently. If the specified value is 10, the lifetime
check occur once over the course of 10 script executions.

The default value is 10.


LifetimeProcessLimit
Specifies the maximum number of seconds the file lifetime check is allowed to continue. The lifetime
check randomly examines cached files. If the StagingProcessDownloads directory consists of many
files, this option has the effect of randomly processing a subset of files each time the lifetime check
takes place. Over time, all of the files are examined.

The default value is 300.


LogTypes
Specifies the type of logging to be reported. The following are valid log types:

NONE

ERROR

WARNING

INFORMATION

DEBUG

PERFORMANCE

ALL

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-61


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Note:
Use the + sign to use multiple log types. For example, ERROR+WARNING.

Section 2: ClearanceDB Proxy Configuration

OracleClientDirectory
Specifies the full directory path containing the Oracle Instant Client files.
For example, OracleClientDirectory=c:\apps\instantclient_x_y or OracleClientDirectory=/opt/
instantclient_x_y.
LogFile
Specifies the name of the file where ClearanceDB Proxy messages are logged.
Compress
Specifies whether or not the communications between the ClearanceDB client applications and the
ClearanceDB Proxy are compressed. Compression results in higher performance. Choose one of the
following:

True — Compress ClearanceDB Proxy messages.

False — Do not compress ClearanceDB Proxy messages.


Port
Specifies the port number for ClearanceDB Proxy to use, along with the number of threads that you
want to listen to the port. For example, 7206,8.

Note:
You can specify multiple port numbers like this:

port1,number of threads
port2,number of threads

ProxyClientPassword
Specifies an optional password for ClearanceDB Proxy.

Note:
If you require a password for clients to access the database, it must be specified in the DBC file
like this:
DATASOURCE=<proxy_name>,<port>/<password>

CONNECT_DATA

4-62 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Global configuration options

Specifies the Oracle connection information. Type the information according to the following syntax:

<connect_name>,<user>/<password>@<service_name>

Note:
The value used for <connect_name> must match the value specified in the DBC file.

If you are using an encrypted password in an external file, type the information according to the
following syntax:

<connect_name>,<user>@<service_name>

Use the ClearanceDBUserPasswordFile setting to specify the full path and file name for the file
containing the encrypted Oracle user password.
ClearanceDBUserPasswordFile
Specifies the path to a file containing the Oracle user password.
AdminProxyPassword
Specifies an optional password used to stop a ClearanceDB Proxy via ClearanceDB Client. This
password should be restricted to the proxy administrator only.

Section 3: ClearanceDB update/upload settings

ClearanceDBResultsUploadFile
The name and, optionally, the path of the results file generated by the Clearance Calculator. By
default, the name of this file is ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb.
UploadMethod
The option specifying how to upload data to the ClearanceDB database. You can specify one of the
following:

Proxy — Perform updates using the ClearanceDB Proxy.


NoProxy — Perform updates using the Oracle Client only.

Note:
To use this option, the full Oracle Client must be installed on the machine from which
you want to make database updates.

OracleSqlLoaderExecutable
The name of the Oracle SQL*Loader executable.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-63


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Note:
This is required only if UploadMethod is set to NoProxy.

OracleSqlPlusExecutable
The name of the Oracle SQL*Plus executable.

Note:
This is required only if UploadMethod is set to NoProxy.

ClearanceDBOracleUserCredentials
The Oracle user account information. Type this according to the following syntax:

username/password

Note:
This is required only if UploadMethod is set to NoProxy.

ClearanceDBOracleNetServiceName
The Oracle Net Service Name.

Note:
This is required only if UploadMethod is set to NoProxy.

Section 4: Clearance Analysis configuration

ClearanceExeOptions
-d <value> — Specifies the clearance requirement, in model units.
-n — Checks clearance using NURBS data, if present in your model.
-c — Checks for points of contact and penetration.
-p — (Valid with -c option only) Calculates the depth of penetrations.
-t <value> — (Valid with -c and -p options only) Specifies the contact tolerance.
-e — Automatically sends email messages to owners, as defined in your Clearance Manager
preferences.

Note:
• This option may produce a large number of e-mails and images (if specified).

4-64 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Global configuration options

• For this option to work, each part must have metadata containing the owner's email
address.

-s — Shows only error messages as the Clearance Calculator runs.


-r — Specifies the maximum distance requirement, in model units.
-q <dbc> — Specifies to perform analysis against the ClearanceDB database. You must specify a
DBC file to use this option.

Note:
You only need to use this option if manually running the Clearance Calculator from the
command line, without using the analyze_product.pl or analyze_managed_product.pl
Perl script.

-Q <dbc> — Specifies to perform a ClearanceDB query. A DBC file is optional.

Note:
You only need to use this option if manually running the Clearance Calculator from the
command line, without using the analyze_product.pl or analyze_managed_product.pl
Perl script.

-m <crl> — Includes material thickness in the clearance check. Specify the crl option for more
accurate results.
-l — Applies the default layer filter when checking clearance.
-i — Generates 2D images of the element pairs involved in clearance violations.

Note:
To generate 2D images of clearance issues, you must set the ResultsObject option to
General Clearance Results in the Clearance.cfgglobal file.

-f <output filename> — Saves clearance results as a comma-delimited, quote-enclosed, ASCII


text file. By default, the results file is named results.txt. To give a results file a different name,
type the name after the -f parameter at the command prompt.

Note:
The results.txt file is designed for use by Teamcenter lifecycle visualization mockup and is
not intended for external use. If you choose to use this file in an external process you do
so at your own risk, as this file is unsupported.

ElementType
The clearance element type. Valid options are:

Part
Component
EndItem

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-65


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

EndItemComponent

The default element type is Part.


ResultsGranularity
Specifies how results are reported. Valid options are:

Part
Element

The default results granularity is Element.


RecognizeCADComponents
Specifies whether or not CAD components are recognized during analysis.

Valid values are 0 (off) or 1 (on). The default value is 0.


NumberOfProcesses
The number of CPU processes to use for clearance analysis. This option requires a machine with
multiple processors or multiple cores. The default value is 1.

Note:
The maximum size a process can have may be limited by the operating system, the system
administrator, or otherwise.

NumberOfThreads
The number of threads to use for clearance analysis. The default value is the number of cores on
the machine. Whenever the number of threads is greater than one, the number of processes is
automatically set to one, regardless of the value in the configuration file.

Note:
The maximum size a process can have may be limited by the operating system, the system
administrator, or otherwise.

AbsMemLimit
The amount of physical RAM in megabytes to use for batch mode analysis. When the memory
limit is exceeded, data is unloaded until memory usage falls below the specified amount. If both
AbsMemLimit and RelMemLimit options are used, the lesser effective value is chosen.
RelMemLimit
The percentage of physical RAM to use for Batch Mode analysis. When the memory limit is
exceeded, data is unloaded until memory usage falls below the specified percentage. The default
percentage is 100 percent. You also can force the application to use the virtual memory available on
your machine. You can set a memory limit of up to 200 percent of your physical RAM.

4-66 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Global configuration options

Note:
If both AbsMemLimit and RelMemLimit options are used, the lesser effective value is chosen.

RulesObject
How to obtain the clearance requirement. Valid options are:

Universal Clearance Requirement


Requirement Rules from ClearanceDB Server

Specify to perform analysis using the product's rules and conditions from the ClearanceDB
database. To enable this option, remove the comment symbol (#) that precedes the
RulesObject = Requirement Rules from ClearanceDB Server line.
Variant Analysis

Specify to perform analysis using Teamcenter variant conditions. To enable this option, remove
the comment symbol (#) that precedes the RulesObject = Variant Analysis line.

Note:
If you want to obtain clearance requirements from your organization's ClearanceDB server,
specify Requirement Rules from ClearanceDB Server.

ResultsObject
How to handle the clearance results. Valid options are:

General Clearance Results


ClearanceDB Results

Specify to generate a ClearanceDB results file (ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb). To enable


this option, remove the comment symbol (#) that precedes the ResultsObject = ClearanceDB
Results line.

Note:
To upload results to the server, specify ClearanceDB Results.
You can list the ResultsObject option twice to specify both General Clearance Results and
ClearanceDB Results.

Attribute
Specifications to filter clearance results according to attribute metadata associated with your product
structure. Specify each attribute you want to use, followed by the assembly search method. Each
attribute specification requires a separate entry in the Clearance.cfgglobal or Clearance.cfgproduct
file.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-67


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

Attribute entries must use the following syntax:

Attribute=[attribute_name], [order_of_search_method]

You can search the assembly according to the following criteria:

Part Only
Part Parent Only
Part and Parents (Part First)
Part and Parents (Root First)
Parents Only (Part Parent First)
Parents Only (Root First)

To work with Teamcenter managed products, specify this attribute:

Attribute=__PLM_ABSOCC_UID,Part and Parents (Part First) |

Specify to use product structure absolute occurrences. To enable this option, remove the comment
symbol (#) that precedes the Attribute=__PLM_ABSOCC_UID,Part and Parents (Part First) line.

The following entries are examples:

Attribute=Translation Date,Part Only |

Attribute=End Item,Part Only |

Attribute=End Item,Part Parent Only |

Attribute=End Item,Part and Parents (Part First) |

Attribute=End Item,Part and Parents (Root First) |

Attribute=End Item,Parents Only (Part Parent First) |

Attribute=End Item,Parents Only (Root First) |


EnabledMemAndThroughputLog
Specifies whether to create a log file in the batch clearance directory to log the memory usage and
the element pair throughput at set intervals. Valid options are 0 for no log file or 1 to create the log
file.
MemAndThroughputLogInterval
Number of seconds to specify the interval between entries if EnabledMemAndThroughputLog is
set to 1.
GracefulShutdownTimeout

4-68 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Global configuration options

The time duration the operating system is given to abort the worker process. The specified value is
in seconds. The default value is 60.
MaxFailures
The maximum number of failures per analysis run. The default value is 1000000.
MaxRelFailures
The maximum relative number of failures per run in respect to all element pairs in the test bed. The
specified value is a percentage. The default value is 100.
ProgressDirectory
The directory where intermediate files are placed, including the log file.
OverallTimeout
The maximum duration of the analysis. The default value is 604800, which equals one week.
PairTimeout
The maximum duration of the analysis of a single element pair. If the analysis exceeds the specified
time the analysis fails. The default value is 3600, which equals one hour.
RestartAfterPairTimeout
Specifies whether to restart the clearance analysis if an analysis of a single element pair times out
(exceeds the PairTimeout duration). Valid values are 0 for no restart or 1 to restart. If the clearance
analysis is not restarted, the pair is included as an undefined result in the log file.
MonitorResolution
The maximum frequency of the progress monitoring to standard output. The default value is 60000,
which equals one hour.
MaxPairAttempts
The maximum number of possible attempts to analyze an element pair in the same mode
(approximate or precise). 1 equals approximate and 2 equals precise. The default is 2.
MaxFailuresPerPart
The maximum number of failures before a part is excluded from the analysis. The default value is 2.
MaxRelFailuresPerPart
The maximum relative number of failures before a part is excluded from the analysis in respect to all
occurrences of the element in the test bed. The specified value is a percentage. The default value is
100.
LoadFailures
To include failed element pairs in the results file. Valid options are 0 or 1 for false and true,
respectively.
MaxLogFileSize
The maximum size of individual log files in megabytes. The minimum value is 32 MB and the
maximum value is 2048 MB (minus 1 byte subtracted). The default value is 2048.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-69


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

IdentifyPartsWithDatastores
If part occurrences are identified with file names or with part names in the log file. Valid options are
0 or 1 for false and true, respectively. The default value is 1.
IdentifyPartOccurrencesWithMetadata
If part occurrences are identified with CADIDs or with specified metadata. No values or blank values
indicate the choice of CADIDs. By default, part occurrences are identified with CADIDs.
RecordPartPairAdditionEvents
If test bed (element pair) creation events are recorded in the log file. Valid options are 0 or 1 for false
and true, respectively. The default value is 1.
RecordClearanceResultAdditionEvents
If clearance results creation events are recorded in the log file. Valid options are 0 or 1 for false and
true, respectively. The default value is 1.
OffsetInFaceNormalDirection
(For thick sheet clearance analysis) Which side of the surface the thickness is applied to. Valid
options are 0 or 1 for false and true, respectively. The default value is the current registry value.
ThicknessAttribute
(For thick sheet clearance analysis) Find the thickness value for the surface parts. This can be used
to override the default CAD_PROP_MATERIAL_THICKNESS property name or the currently defined
value in the registry. The default value is CAD_PROP_MATERIAL_THICKNESS or the current registry
value.
DefaultMaterialThickness
(For thick sheet clearance analysis) The default thickness value for surface parts that are missing the
thickness attribute (CAD_PROP_MATERIAL_THICKNESS). If the UseDefaultValue option is set to 1
(true), the default value is the current registry value.
UseDefaultValue
(For thick sheet clearance analysis) To enable or disable the DefaultMaterialThickness value
for surface parts with no material thickness property (CAD_PROP_MATERIAL_THICKNESS). Valid
options are 0 or 1 for false and true, respectively.
SnapshotImageDirectory
(For use with 2D image captures) The directory where 2D image captures are placed.
SnapshotImageSize
(For use with 2D image captures) The size of 2D image captures. In pixels, specify the width and
height of the generated images. The default size is 512,512.
SnapshotImagePNG
(For use with 2D image captures) The 2D image capture format. You can generate 2D captures in the
PNG or JPEG formats. Use a value of 1 to create PNG images; use a value of 0 to create JPEG images.
By default, JPEG files are created.

4-70 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Global configuration options

SnapshotImageBackground
(For use with 2D image captures) The color to use for the background shown behind the two
elements involved in the clearance issue. This setting requires separate red, green, and blue values.
By default, the background is set to 190,210,225.
SnapshotImagePartColor1
(For use with 2D image captures) The color to use for the first part involved in the clearance issue.
This setting requires separate red, green, and blue values. If this setting is used, by default the part
color is set to 0,0,255. If this setting is not turned on the original part color is used.
SnapshotImagePartTransp1
(For use with 2D image captures) The transparency setting for the first part involved in the clearance
issue. You can use any value from 0.0 (invisible) to 1.0 (opaque). If this setting is used, the default
value is 0.5.
SnapshotImagePartColor2
(For use with 2D image captures) The color to use for the second part involved in the clearance
issue. This setting requires separate red, green, and blue values. If this setting is used, by default the
part color is set to 0,255,0. If this setting is not turned on the original part color is used.
SnapshotImagePartTransp2
(For use with 2D image captures) The transparency setting for the second part involved in the
clearance issue. You can use any value from 0.0 (invisible) to 1.0 (opaque). If this setting is used, the
default value is 0.5.
SnapshotImageAdvTransparency
(For use with 2D image captures) To render part transparency with fewer artifacts. Use a value of 1
to turn on advanced transparency.
SnapshotImageShowCPPoints
(For use with 2D image captures) To show the points of contact or penetration. Use a value of 1 to
include the contact and penetration points in 2D image captures.
SnapshotImageCPPointsColor
(For use with 2D image captures) The color to use for points of contact or penetration. This setting
requires separate red, green, and blue values. If this setting is used, by default the contact and
penetration point color is set to 255,255,0.
SnapshotImageCPPointsSize
(For use with 2D image captures) The size, in pixels, to use for points of contact or penetration. If
this setting is used, the default value is 3.
SnapshotImageZoom
(For use with 2D image captures) The zoom factor for clearance issues. You can use any value from
0 to 100. A value of 0 shows the entire element pair. A value of 100 zooms to the contact or
penetration points, or distance lines. If this setting is used, the default value is 40.
SnapshotImageShowDistanceLines

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-71


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

(For use with 2D image captures) Display distance lines in the image capture. Valid options are 0 or
1 for off and on, respectively. By default, distance lines are not shown.
SnapshotImageShowResultVector
(For use with 2D image captures) Display the result vector in the image capture. Valid options are 0
or 1 for off and on, respectively. By default, the result vector is not shown.
SnapshotImageShowBBox
(For use with 2D image captures) Display the bounding box in the image capture. Valid options are 0
or 1 for off and on, respectively. By default, the bounding box is not shown.

Configure the global DBC file

You must modify the global Database Connection (DBC) file with the system name and port number of
the machine running your ClearanceDB Proxy. You must also specify a name for the proxy connection,
which must be the same as the connect_name value specified in the CONNECT_DATA string in the
Clearance.cfgglobal file.

Note:
By default, the global.dbc file is used by ClearanceDB components to connect with the specified
database. You can also create additional DBC files to connect with databases on a product by
product basis. Product-specific DBC files are created when you run the create_product.pl script to
create products. Product-specific DBC files override the global DBC file.

1. Navigate to the ClearanceDB Work Area.

2. Using a text editor, open global.dbc and specify the following settings:

For this parameter Type


DATASOURCE The ClearanceDB Proxy system name and port number.

Note:
If the ClearanceDB Proxy you want to connect to requires
a password, include the password at the end of the
DATASOURCE string like this:
<machine>:<port>/<password>

CONNECT_DATA A name to identify the connection.


WEB_SERVICE HTTP communication protocol for ClearanceDB.
WEB_SERVICE_URL HTTP or HTTPS web service URL used by ClearanceDB.

4-72 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Configure the global .vvi file

For this parameter Type


SSO_SERVICE_LOGIN_URL The URL used by the TcSS solution for single sign-on.
CLEARANCE_APPID The application id defined in the TcSS Application Registry.

3. Save the file.

Configure the global .vvi file

If you want to work with Teamcenter managed data, you must specify the web server protocol used by
your Teamcenter installation in the global.vvi file.

1. Navigate to the ClearanceDB Work Area.

2. Using a text editor, open the global.vvi file.

3. For the 0_Protocol parameter, type your web server protocol.

Example:
0_Protocol = http

4. Save the file.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 4-73


© 2024 Siemens
4. Installing and configuring ClearanceDB

4-74 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis
Performing analysis overview
Clearance checks are performed using the viewer (stand-alone Mockup, the Lifecycle Viewer, Structure
Manager, or Design Context) or the Clearance Calculator. Analysis can refer to either the standard single
requirement defined in the viewer or on rules and conditions stored in the ClearanceDB database. The
latter method allows for incremental calculations in respect to the database content.

Performing clearance analysis on a product generates a clearance results file called


ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb. This file contains the product definition (names of assemblies and
parts, their CADIDs, locations, and metadata) and the clearance issues with their geometric attributes.
To view clearance results in the viewer, this file must be uploaded to the database.

To perform analysis on a product and update the database with the results, you must take the following
steps:

• Configure the batch analysis options for the Clearance Calculator

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-1


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

• Use the Clearance Calculator to perform analysis on your product

• Upload the results generated by the Clearance Calculator to the ClearanceDB database

You should understand the log files generated when you run the Clearance Calculator in case errors
occur. It also may be useful to understand the ClearanceDB results file format.

Setting up products for analysis

Perl and SQL script reference

Use the following scripts to manage the ClearanceDB proxy and your products.

Note:
The ClearanceDB SQL scripts are case-sensitive.

Proxy management scripts

Use this script To do this


create_proxy.pl Create a new ClearanceDB Proxy.
Usage:
create_proxy.pl <proxy name>
ping_database.pl Test database connectivity.
Usage:
ping_database.pl [<proxy host name> <port> <connect data>]
ping_proxy.pl Test to determine if the proxy is running.
Usage:
ping_proxy.pl [<proxy host name> <port>]
start_proxy.pl Start a ClearanceDB Proxy.
Usage:
start_proxy.pl <proxy configuration file>
stop_proxy.pl Stop a ClearanceDB Proxy.
Usage:
stop_proxy.pl <proxy configuration file>

5-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Perl and SQL script reference

Product management scripts

Use this script To do this


analyze_managed_product.pl Perform analysis on a Teamcenter managed product.
Usage:
analyze_managed_product.pl <product>
analyze_product.pl Perform analysis on a product.
Usage:
analyze_product.pl <product>
copy_product.pl Copy an existing ClearanceDB product and use it to create a new
product in both your work area and the database.
Usage:
copy_product.pl <product name> <new product name>
create_product.pl Create a new product.
Usage:
create_product.pl <name> [-uc:-ur:-ud:-uz:-ua] [-ds <datasource>
-cd <connection name>]
delete_product.pl Delete a ClearanceDB product from both your work area and the
database.
Usage:
delete_product.pl <product name>
list_all_products.pl List all of the ClearanceDB products in the database.
Usage:
list_all_products.pl [<proxy host name> <port> <connect data>]
list_product.pl Display information about a ClearanceDB product.
Usage:
list_product.pl <product>
rename_product.pl Rename a ClearanceDB product in both your work area and the
database.
Usage:
rename_product.pl <product name> <new product name>

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-3


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

General administration scripts

Use this script To do this


create_ClearanceDB_working_dir.pl Create the ClearanceDB Work Area.
Usage:
create_ClearanceDB_working_dir.pl <path> [-df]
create_default_product.pl Create the default product.
Usage:
create_default_product.pl <path>
update_product.pl Upload product information to the database.
Usage:
update_product.pl [product] -uc:-ur:-ud:-uz:-ua [-df]

Setting up products for analysis

ClearanceDB products consist of the specific metadata configurations, rules, conditions, and zones
associated with the 3D model that you want to analyze.

Creating ClearanceDB products for analysis consists of the following tasks:

• Creating the ClearanceDB default product — Before you can populate the database with new
product information, create the ClearanceDB default product. The default product is essentially
a global configuration that you can customize to match your unique analysis requirements and
automatically apply to new products that your create.

• Creating a new ClearanceDB product — Create a ClearanceDB product for each model you want to
analyze.

• Creating the ALL product for issue inheritance — More than one instance of the same violating
part pairs may exist in your clearance results. Inheritance relationships can be defined in your
database so that these issues are not always duplicated but instead are managed based on their
level of similarity.

• Using the product-specific configuration file — Each ClearanceDB product has its own configuration
file, which is used to specify the location of the data to be analyzed by the Clearance Calculator.
You can also use product-specific configuration files to override any of the parameters from the
Clearance.cfgglobal file.

• Creating ClearanceDB product configurations — Create a process configuration file for each of your
products to control the analysis.

5-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Understanding the ClearanceDB default product

• Specifying rules and conditions — Create unique rules and conditions to define clearance
requirements or exclusions and to control the scope of the analysis.

• Defining clearance zones — Create clearance zones to perform analysis based upon the location of
parts and assemblies within the model.

Configuring the ClearanceDB default product

Understanding the ClearanceDB default product

The ClearanceDB default product is essentially a global configuration that you can customize to match
your unique analysis requirements and automatically apply to new products that you create.

To create the default product, do any of the following:

• Run the create_ClearanceDB_working_dir.pl script with the -df option.

• Run the create_default_product.pl script.

• Run the create_product.pl script with no default product (the default product must exist in the
database to create new products so in this situation it will be created and uploaded to the database
automatically).

Create the ClearanceDB default product

1. Install the ClearanceDB Client or Clearance Calculator.

2. Open a command prompt and type

create_default_product.pl <path>

where

For this parameter Type


path The path to the location on your machine where you want to create the
default product.

Example:
create_default_product.pl c:\

A new directory named DEFAULT is created at the specified location. The DEFAULT directory
contains the following files:

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-5


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

• conditions.csvcldb

• configuration.csvcldb

• rules.csvcldb

• zones.csvcldb

3. Using a text editor, modify each configuration file to create the product configuration that you want
to use in the creation of new products.

4. Update the database in one of the following ways:

To upload configuration files Do this


From the command prompt Type
update_product.pl [<product>] -uc:-
ur:-ud:-uz:-ua [-df]
where

-uc — The option to upload the


configuration.csvcldb file.
-ur — The option to upload the
rules.csvcldb and conditions.csvcldb files.
-uz — The option to upload the
zones.csvcldb.
-ua — The option to upload all of the
configuration files.

Example:
update_product.pl fishing_reel
-ua

(Windows) From the shortcut menu In the product directory, right-click any
configuration file and choose Upload to
ClearanceDB.

Create a new ClearanceDB product

Create a new ClearanceDB product, both locally in your ClearanceDB Work Area and in the database.

1. Open a command prompt and navigate to the ClearanceDB Work Area.

5-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Create a new ClearanceDB product

Note:
You must create new products from the ClearanceDB Work Area.

2. From the command prompt, type

create_product.pl <name> [-uc:-ur:-uz:-ua] [-ds <datasource> -cd <connection name>]

where

This
parameter Does this
name Specifies the name of the ClearanceDB product. The ClearanceDB product name
must consist of the name of the top level assembly node from your product data.
If the name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks. For example, “garage
door opener”.
If you are working with local, unmanaged data, open the 3D model in Mockup to
obtain the name of the top level assembly node.

Top level assembly node in Mockup

If you are working with data from Teamcenter, send the item revision to Structure
Manager to obtain the name of the top level assembly node.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-7


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

This
parameter Does this

Top level assembly node in Structure Manager

Note:
A BOMline name from Teamcenter has a space before (View), and
ClearanceDB product names with spaces must be enclosed in quotation
marks, as shown below.
“331–61965 1/A;1-Roof Assembly (View)”

If you are working within a Teamcenter multifield key environment, see


Configuring ClearanceDB for multifield key data.
-uc:-ur:-uz:- Creates copies of the default product's configuration, rules, conditions, and zones
ua information for you to customize for the product.
Choose from the following:

• -uc — Create a configuration.csvcldb file.

• -ur — Create rules.csvcldb and conditions.csvcldb files.

• -uz — Create a zones.csvcldb file

• -ua — Create copies of all of the product configuration files.


ds Creates a DBC file for the product. For datasource, type the name and port of the
datasource system running the ClearanceDB Proxy.
cd Creates a DBC file for the product. For connection name, type the name used to
connection identify the proxy connection.
name

5-8 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Using the product-specific configuration file

Example:
• Local product: create_product.pl cottonpicker -ua -ds sfdmachine:7206 -cd CLDB

• Teamcenter product: create_product.pl “000092/A;1-cottonpicker (View)” -ua -ds


sfdmachine:7206 -cd CLDB

A new directory with the name you specified is created in the ClearanceDB Work Area. At a
minimum, the directory contains the Clearance.cfgproduct file. The directory may also contain
copies of the default product's configuration files or a DBC file, depending upon how you ran the
script.

3. (If you created copies of the default product's configuration files) Modify the configuration files
as necessary for your product, and then update the database with your changes in one of the
following ways:

To upload Do this
configuration files
From the command Type
prompt
update_product.pl [<product>] [-uc:-ur:-uz:-ua] [-df]
where

-uc — The option to upload the configuration.csvcldb file.


-ur — The option to upload the rules.csvcldb and conditions.csvcldb
files.
-uz — The option to upload the zones.csvcldb.
-ua — The option to upload all of the configuration files.

Example:
update_product.pl cottonpicker -ua

(Windows) From the In the product directory, right-click any configuration file and choose
shortcut menu Upload to ClearanceDB.

Using the product-specific configuration file

For the Clearance Calculator to analyze your product, you must specify the product in the
Clearance.cfgproduct file. For data located outside of Teamcenter, you must specify the file name and
full path to the product. For Teamcenter managed data, you must specify the item ID and revision of the
top level assembly of your product. If your Teamcenter data is configured with multifield key data, you
must specify the item key.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-9


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

Note:
You can also use the product-specific configuration file to override any of the settings contained in
the Clearance.cfgglobal global configuration file. To override the global settings on a per-product
basis, copy the settings from the Clearance.cfgglobal file to the Clearance.cfgproduct file and
modify them appropriately.

1. In the ClearanceDB Work Area, navigate to the product folder.

2. Using a text editor, open the Clearance.cfgproduct file and specify the following settings:

For this option Type this


ProductInputFile The file name and full path to the product.

Example:
ProductInputFile= c:\fishing_reel.jt

Note:
This setting is applicable only to product data that is not stored in
Teamcenter.

ItemKey The Teamcenter values (strings) of the multifield key properties for the item
containing your product.

Example:
ItemKey=item_id= 000092,MFK_strkey1=val1

Note:
This setting is applicable only to Teamcenter products configured with
multifield key data. It corresponds to the –key argument for the
Teamcenter BOMwriter utility.
You can obtain the necessary multifield key strings using the
Teamcenter get_key_string utility.

ItemId The Teamcenter item ID of the top level assembly of your product.

Example:
ItemId=000092

5-10 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Accuracy of clearance calculations

For this option Type this

Note:
This setting corresponds to the –item argument for the Teamcenter
BOMwriter utility.

ItemRevision The Teamcenter revision of the top level assembly of your product.

Example:
ItemRevision=A

Note:
This setting corresponds to the –rev argument for the Teamcenter
BOMwriter utility.

3. Save the file.

Performing analysis

Accuracy of clearance calculations

Clearance analysis is the process of considering a model in terms of the spatial relationships between its
parts or part groups. The location of each part or group within the model is compared to the location of
every other part or group within the model. Any part or group pairs that are closer to one another than
the specified clearance requirement is identified as a clearance issue.

You can define inheritance relationships in your database so that issues that are instances of the same
violating part pairs are not always duplicated in the clearance results but instead are managed based on
their level of similarity.

During clearance analysis, first the bounding boxes of each part or group pair are tested. If the bounding
boxes do not intersect and the minimum distance between them is greater than the specified clearance
requirement value, the part or group pairs are not identified as clearance issues and do not appear in the
Results list.

For each part or group pair with bounding boxes that do intersect, or where the minimum distance
between them is less than the clearance requirement, the tessellated geometry of the two parts is then
tested. If the geometry does not intersect and the minimum distance between the parts or groups is
greater than the contact tolerance value, the two parts or groups are not identified as clearance issues
and do not appear in the Results list.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-11


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

If the tessellated geometry intersects or if the minimum distance between the parts or groups is less
than the contact tolerance value, the NURBS data (if it is available in your model) of the two parts or
groups is then tested. The NURBS test determines the exact points of contact between the two parts or
groups.

Once points of contact are identified, the tessellated geometry and the contact tolerance value you
have specified are used to determine whether the parts or groups are in contact only or whether
one part or group penetrates the other. If one part penetrates the other to a depth greater than the
contact tolerance value, the penetration depth is calculated for the part pair. The penetration depth is
calculated as the distance the two penetrating parts need to be moved away from each other to avoid
the penetration.

Example:
Because of the way clearance is calculated, some clearance checks may not yield the results you
expect. For example, if a clearance check results in a part pair that consists of a cylinder and the
hole with which it is designed to mate, you may expect the penetration depth to describe the
difference in the diameters of the cylinder and the hole when in actuality the penetration depth
describes the depth along the length of the cylinder.

Penetration depth calculations are always an approximation, even when using precise data. A precise
depth calculation requires a manually specified extraction vector, which is the direction used to separate
a penetrating part pair. Without an extraction vector, an infinite number of solutions are possible for
each penetration. Since user input is not possible during batch calculations, an algorithm estimates the
extraction vector for each penetration. This estimation is the direction in which the parts move the
shortest distance in order to eliminate the penetration.

Note:
Penetration depth estimations may vary slightly on different platforms due to factors such as
different CPUs, different operating systems, and 32-bit versus 64-bit architectures. The penetration
depths provided by Teamcenter lifecycle visualization are intended to provide a reasonable
approximation of the penetrations. Only the designers of the geometry know how to best resolve
each penetration, so they need to use the penetration depth as a guide to help them quickly locate
and resolve clearance issues.

Clearance elements and CAD components

Elements and CAD components are the parts and branches of product structure recognized for clearance
analysis in Teamcenter lifecycle visualization. They are used to control the granularity of the analysis.

There are three element types: parts, leaf components, and end items. Any combination of these
elements can exist in the product structure for use during a clearance analysis. However, the part
element type is always turned on.

5-12 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Clearance elements and CAD components

If an element contains other elements within it, no clearance issues between those elements are
reported in the clearance results list. Also, any two leaf components or end items can have many clashes
between them, but only the single, most severe result between any two elements is reported.

The items that appear in the clearance results list are always elements. A CAD component is essentially
an end item that allows any number of clearance results between itself and other nodes. For this reason,
a CAD component is not considered an element.

Element type Behavior


Part

Analysis
The lowest level elements in the clearance analysis are parts. Analysis is always
conducted between part elements, unless the parts are overridden by other
element types (leaf components and end items) or CAD components.
Results

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-13


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

Element type Behavior


Only issues between parts are displayed in the clearance results, even if leaf
components, end items, or CAD components exist in the structure.
Leaf component

Analysis
The lowest level elements in the clearance analysis are parts, unless they are
overridden by leaf components. In that case, all of the parts underneath the leaf
component node are considered to be part of the same, monolithic element.
Results
Only the single, most severe result between each leaf component and other
elements is displayed. That result appears in the clearance results list as the leaf
component itself (not the parts within the leaf component).

5-14 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Clearance elements and CAD components

Element type Behavior


End item

Analysis
The lowest level elements in the clearance analysis are parts, unless they are
overridden by an end-item. In that case, all of the parts underneath the end item
node are considered to be part of the same, monolithic element.
Results
Only the single, most severe result between each end item and other elements
is displayed. That result appears in the list as the end item itself (not the parts
within the end-item).

Note:
End items are branches of product structure where the root node contains
the metadata __PLM_END_ITEM=True.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-15


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

Element type Behavior


Leaf components
and end items

Analysis
The lowest level elements in the clearance analysis are parts, unless they are
overridden by a leaf component or end item. In that case, all of the parts
underneath the “parent” node are considered to be part of the same, monolithic
element.
Results
No issues are reported between elements within the leaf component or end item.
Only the single, most severe result between each leaf component or end item and

5-16 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Configure the Clearance Calculator

Element type Behavior


other elements is displayed. That result appears in the list as the root item (not
the parts within the root item).
CAD components

Analysis
The lowest level elements in the clearance analysis are parts, unless they are
overridden by a CAD component. In that case, all of the parts underneath
the CAD component node are considered to be part of the same monolithic
component.
Results
No issues are reported between elements within the CAD component. However,
any number of issues may be reported between elements within the CAD
component and other elements in the model. Those results appear in the list
as the elements themselves (not the CAD component).

Note:
CAD components are branches of product structure where the root node
contains the metadata __PLM_CADCOMPONENT=True.

Configure the Clearance Calculator

Use the Section 4: Clearance Analysis configuration section of the Clearance.cfgglobal file to specify
options for clearance analysis. The settings from this file are applied to all of the clearance products
in the ClearanceDB Work Area, unless the settings are manually copied into the Clearance.cfgproduct

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-17


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

for a specific product. Any settings specified in the Clearance.cfgproduct take precedence over the
Clearance.cfgglobal file.

Note:
• All values for all time-based options are in seconds, with the exception of MonitorResolution,
which is in milliseconds.

• If RecordPartPairAdditionEvents and RecordClearanceResultAdditionEvents are set to 0 in


the Clearance.cfgglobal file, only major events such as process restarts or analysis failures are
reported in the log file.

1. Navigate to the ClearanceDB Work Area:

2. Using a text editor, open the Clearance.cfgglobal file.

3. To configure the clearance analysis, change any of the settings contained in Section 4: Clearance
Analysis configuration of the global configuration file.

5-18 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Run the Clearance Calculator

4. Save the file.

Run the Clearance Calculator

Take the following steps to perform ClearanceDB analysis using the Clearance Calculator:

1. Navigate to the appropriate product directory in your ClearanceDB Work Area.

2. Using a text editor, open the Clearance.cfgproduct file and ensure that the ProductInputFile
setting points to the location of your product data.

3. Do any of the following:

To run the Clearance Do this


Calculator
From the command prompt Type
analyze_product.pl [<product>]

Example:
analyze_product.pl fishing_reel

From the shortcut menu In the products directory, right-click the Clearance.cfgproduct file
and choose Analyze Product.

The analysis runs, and when it is complete the clearance results file,
ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb, appears in the product directory.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-19


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

Understanding the results file format

ClearanceDB results are saved as the ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb file. Each record in this file
consists of four fields:

1 — Record type
2 — Entity ID
3 — Entity attribute name or referenced entity ID
4 — Entity attribute value or referenced entity ID

The following four record types are supported:

Record type 0 — general timing information

1 — Record type = 0
2 — Timestamp
3 — Event name
4 — Formatted timestamp

Record type 3 — clearance node pair definition

1 — Record type = 3
2 — Calculator clearance ID
3 — Left calculator node ID
4 — Right calculator node ID

Record type 4 — node definition

1 — Record type = 4
2 — Calculator node ID
3 — Node attribute name
4 — Node attribute value

Record type 5 — clearance definition

1 — Record type = 5
2 — Calculator clearance ID
3 — Clearance attribute name
4 — Clearance attribute value

5-20 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Introduction to performing clearance batch analysis

Performing clearance batch analysis

Introduction to performing clearance batch analysis

You can manually perform clearance analysis on your 3D data outside of the Mockup application. There
are two options:

• Use the supplied Perl scripts to create and manage clearance products within a Clearance Work Area
on your local machine.

• Perform clearance analysis without the Perl scripts.

Creating a Clearance Work Area

You can create an area on your machine from which you can run and manage clearance batch analysis.

Note:
Perl version 5.03 or later is required for the creation of a Clearance Work Area. If Perl is not already
installed on your system or you have a version earlier than 5.03, many sources are available for
you to manually install the latest distribution, such as from http://www.activestate.com.

1. Open a command prompt and navigate to the ClearanceDB Perl scripts, which are located at the
following location within the stand-alone Lifecycle Visualization installation:

Example:
<Mockup installation directory>/Visualization/Products/Mockup/ClearanceDB

2. At the command prompt, type

create_ClearanceDB_working_dir.pl <path> [-lo]

For path, type the location on your machine where you want to create the work area. lo is the
option to create the work area.

Note:
The path parameter is used to specify the location of the work area, not the name of the
work area, which is always Clearance_Work_Area.

Example:
create_ClearanceDB_working_dir.pl c:\ -lo

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-21


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

A new directory named Clearance_Work_Area is created at the specified location.

Create a clearance product

When you create a clearance product, a directory is added to the Clearance Work Area, from which you
can specify clearance analysis options, perform the analysis, and access the results.

1. Open a command prompt and navigate to the Clearance Work Area.

Note:
You must create new clearance products from the Clearance Work Area.

2. At the command prompt, type

create_product.pl <name>

where name is the name you want to use for the new product folder.

Note:
If the name contains spaces, enclose it in quotation marks. For example, “garage door
opener”.

Example:
create_product.pl shock_absorber

A new directory with the name you specified is created in the Clearance Work Area. The directory
contains a unique Clearance.cfgproduct file within which you must specify the path to the data you
want to analyze. You can also use the file to control the clearance analysis.

Configure Clearance products for analysis

Use the Clearance.cfgglobal file to specify options for clearance analysis. The settings from this file
are applied to all of the clearance products in the Clearance Work Area, unless the settings are
manually copied into the Clearance.cfgproduct for a specific product. Any settings specified in the
Clearance.cfgproduct take precedence over the Clearance.cfgglobal file.

Note:
• All values for all time-based options are in seconds, with the exception of
MonitorResolution, which is in milliseconds.

5-22 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Configure Clearance products for analysis

• If RecordPartPairAdditionEvents and RecordClearanceResultAdditionEvents


are set to 0, only major events such as process restarts or analysis failures are reported in
the log file.

1. Navigate to the Clearance Work Area.

2. Using a text editor, open the Clearance.cfgglobal file.

3. Change any of the following settings in the Section 4: Clearance Analysis configuration section of
the file to configure the analysis:

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-23


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

For this option Type


ClearanceExeOptions -d <value> — Specifies the clearance
requirement, in model units.
-n — Checks clearance using NURBS data,
if present in your model.
-c — Checks for points of contact and
penetration.
-p — (Valid with -c option only)
Calculates the depth of penetrations.
-t <value> — (Valid with -c and
-p options only) Specifies the contact
tolerance.
-e — Automatically sends email messages
to owners, as specified in your Clearance
Manager preferences.
-s — Shows only error messages as the
Clearance Calculator runs.
-r — Specifies the maximum distance
requirement, in model units.
-b <value> — Specify the directory to
use for fault-tolerant restarts.
-m <crl> — Includes material thickness
in the clearance check. Specify the crl
option for more accurate results.
-l — Applies the default layer filter when
checking clearance.
-i — Generates 2D images of the
element pairs involved in clearance
violations.

Note:
To generate 2D images of
clearance issues, you must set
the ResultsObject option to
General Clearance Results in
the Clearance.cfgglobal file.

-f <output filename> — Saves


clearance results as a comma-delimited,
quote-enclosed, ASCII text file. By default,
the results file is named Results.txt. To
give a results file a different name, type
the name after the -f parameter at the
command prompt.
ElementType The clearance element type. Valid options are:

5-24 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Configure Clearance products for analysis

For this option Type


Part
Leaf Component
EndItem
EndItemComponent

The default element type is Part.


NumberOfProcesses The number of CPU processes to use for
clearance analysis. This option requires a
machine with multiple processors or multiple
cores. The default value is 1.

Note:
The maximum size a process can have
may be limited by the operating system,
the system administrator, or otherwise.

NumberOfThreads The number of threads to use for clearance


analysis. The default value is the number of
cores on the machine. Whenever the number
of threads is greater than one, the number of
processes is automatically set to one, regardless
of the value in the configuration file.
AbsMemLimit The amount of physical RAM in megabytes
to use for batch mode analysis. When
the memory limit is exceeded, data is
unloaded until memory usage falls below the
specified amount. If both AbsMemLimit and
RelMemLimit options are used, the lesser
effective value is chosen.
RelMemLimit The percentage of physical RAM to use for
Batch Mode analysis. When the memory limit
is exceeded, data is unloaded until memory
usage falls below the specified percentage. The
default percentage is 100 percent. You also
can force the application to use the virtual
memory available on your machine. You can set
a memory limit of up to 200 percent of your
physical RAM.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-25


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

For this option Type

Note:
If both AbsMemLimit and
RelMemLimit options are used, the
lesser effective value is chosen.

RulesObject How to obtain the clearance requirement.


For local clearance analysis, use Universal
Clearance Requirement.
ResultsObject How to handle the clearance results. For local
clearance analysis, use General Clearance
Results.
Attribute Specifications to filter clearance results
according to attribute metadata associated
with your product structure. Specify each
attribute you want to use, followed by
the assembly search method. Each attribute
specification requires a separate entry in the
Clearance.cfgglobal or Clearance.cfgproduct
file.
Attribute entries must use the following syntax:
Attribute=[attribute_name],
[order_of_search_method]
You can search the assembly according to the
following criteria:

Part Only
Part Parent Only
Part and Parents (Part First)
Part and Parents (Root First)
Parents Only (Part Parent
First)
Parents Only (Root First)

The following entries are examples:


Attribute=Translation Date,Part
Only |
Attribute=End Item,Part Only |
Attribute=End Item,Part Parent Only
|

5-26 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Configure Clearance products for analysis

For this option Type


Attribute=End Item,Part and Parents
(Part First) |
Attribute=End Item,Part and Parents
(Root First) |
Attribute=End Item,Parents Only
(Part Parent First) |
Attribute=End Item,Parents Only
(Root First) |
EnabledMemAndThroughputLog Specifies whether to create a log file in the
batch clearance directory to log the memory
usage and the element pair throughput at set
intervals. Valid options are 0 for no log file or 1
to create the log file.
MemAndThroughputLogInterval Number of seconds to specify
the interval between entries if
EnabledMemAndThroughputLog is set to 1.
GracefulShutdownTimeout The time duration the operating system is given
to abort the worker process. The specified value
is in seconds. The default value is 60.
MaxFailures The maximum number of failures per analysis
run. The default value is 1000000.
MaxRelFailures The maximum relative number of failures per
run in respect to all element pairs in the test
bed. The specified value is a percentage. The
default value is 100.
ProgressDirectory The directory where intermediate files are
placed, including the log file.
OverallTimeout The maximum duration of the analysis. The
default value is 604800, which equals one
week.
PairTimeout The maximum duration of the analysis of a
single element pair. If the analysis exceeds the
specified time the analysis fails. The default
value is 3600, which equals one hour.
RestartAfterPairTimeout Specifies whether to restart the clearance
analysis if an analysis of a single element
pair times out (exceeds the PairTimeout
duration). Valid values are 0 for no restart or
1 to restart. If the clearance analysis is not

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-27


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

For this option Type


restarted, the pair is included as an undefined
result in the log file.
MonitorResolution The maximum frequency of the progress
monitoring to standard output. The default
value is 60000, which equals one hour.
MaxPairAttempts The maximum number of possible attempts to
analyze an element pair in the same mode
(approximate or precise). 1 equals approximate
and 2 equals precise. The default is 2.
MaxFailuresPerPart The maximum number of failures before a part
is excluded from the analysis. The default value
is 2.
MaxRelFailuresPerPart The maximum relative number of failures
before a part is excluded from the analysis in
respect to all occurrences of the element in the
test bed. The specified value is a percentage.
The default value is 100.
LoadFailures To include failed element pairs in the results
file. Valid options are 0 or 1 for false and true,
respectively.
MaxLogFileSize The maximum size of individual log files in
megabytes. The minimum value is 32 MB and
the maximum value is 2048 MB (minus 1 byte
subtracted). The default value is 2048.
IdentifyPartsWithDatastores If part occurrences are identified with file
names or with part names in the log file.
Valid options are 0 or 1 for false and true,
respectively. The default value is 1.
IdentifyPartOccurrencesWithMetadata If part occurrences are identified with CADIDs
or with specified metadata. No values or
blank values indicate the choice of CADIDs.
By default, part occurrences are identified with
CADIDs.
RecordPartPairAdditionEvents If test bed (element pair) creation events are
recorded in the log file. Valid options are 0 or
1 for false and true, respectively. The default
value is 1.
RecordClearanceResultAdditionEvents If clearance results creation events are recorded
in the log file. Valid options are 0 or 1 for false
and true, respectively. The default value is 1.

5-28 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Configure Clearance products for analysis

For this option Type


OffsetInFaceNormalDirection (For thick sheet clearance analysis) Which side
of the surface the thickness is applied to.
Valid options are 0 or 1 for false and true,
respectively. The default value is the current
registry value.
ThicknessAttribute (For thick sheet clearance analysis) Find
the thickness value for the surface parts.
This can be used to override the default
CAD_PROP_MATERIAL_THICKNESS property
name or the currently defined value
in the registry. The default value is
CAD_PROP_MATERIAL_THICKNESS or the
current registry value.
DefaultMaterialThickness (For thick sheet clearance analysis) The
default thickness value for surface parts
that are missing the thickness attribute
(CAD_PROP_MATERIAL_THICKNESS). If the
UseDefaultValue option is set to 1 (true),
the default value is the current registry value.
UseDefaultValue (For thick sheet clearance analysis) To enable
or disable the DefaultMaterialThickness
value for surface parts with
no material thickness property
(CAD_PROP_MATERIAL_THICKNESS). Valid
options are 0 or 1 for false and true,
respectively.
SnapshotImageDirectory (For use with 2D image captures) The directory
where 2D image captures are placed.
SnapshotImageSize (For use with 2D image captures) The size of 2D
image captures. In pixels, specify the width and
height of the generated images. The default
size is 512,512.
SnapshotImagePNG (For use with 2D image captures) The 2D image
capture format. You can generate 2D captures
in the PNG or JPEG formats. Use a value of 1 to
create PNG images; use a value of 0 to create
JPEG images. By default, JPEG files are created.
SnapshotImageBackground (For use with 2D image captures) The color
to use for the background shown behind the
two elements involved in the clearance issue.
This setting requires separate red, green, and

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-29


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

For this option Type


blue values. By default, the background is set to
190,210,225.
SnapshotImagePartColor1 (For use with 2D image captures) The color to
use for the first part involved in the clearance
issue. This setting requires separate red, green,
and blue values. If this setting is used, by
default the part color is set to 0,0,255. If this
setting is not turned on the original part color is
used.
SnapshotImagePartTransp1 (For use with 2D image captures) The
transparency setting for the first part involved
in the clearance issue. You can use any value
from 0.0 (invisible) to 1.0 (opaque). If this
setting is used, the default value is 0.5.
SnapshotImagePartColor2 (For use with 2D image captures) The color
to use for the second part involved in the
clearance issue. This setting requires separate
red, green, and blue values. If this setting
is used, by default the part color is set to
0,255,0. If this setting is not turned on the
original part color is used.
SnapshotImagePartTransp2 (For use with 2D image captures) The
transparency setting for the second part
involved in the clearance issue. You can use any
value from 0.0 (invisible) to 1.0 (opaque). If
this setting is used, the default value is 0.5.
SnapshotImageAdvTransparency (For use with 2D image captures) To render part
transparency with fewer artifacts. Use a value
of 1 to turn on advanced transparency.
SnapshotImageShowCPPoints (For use with 2D image captures) To show the
points of contact or penetration. Use a value of
1 to include the contact and penetration points
in 2D image captures.
SnapshotImageCPPointsColor (For use with 2D image captures) The color to
use for points of contact or penetration. This
setting requires separate red, green, and blue
values. If this setting is used, by default the
contact and penetration point color is set to
255,255,0.
SnapshotImageCPPointsSize (For use with 2D image captures) The size,
in pixels, to use for points of contact or

5-30 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Analyze clearance products from the Clearance Work Area

For this option Type


penetration. If this setting is used, the default
value is 3.
SnapshotImageZoom (For use with 2D image captures) The zoom
factor for clearance issues. You can use any
value from 0 to 100. A value of 0 shows the
entire element pair. A value of 100 zooms to
the contact or penetration points, or distance
lines. If this setting is used, the default value is
40.
SnapshotImageShowDistanceLines (For use with 2D image captures) Display
distance lines in the image capture. Valid
options are 0 or 1 for off and on, respectively.
By default, distance lines are not shown.
SnapshotImageShowResultVector (For use with 2D image captures) Display the
result vector in the image capture. Valid options
are 0 or 1 for off and on, respectively. By
default, the result vector is not shown.
SnapshotImageShowBBox (For use with 2D image captures) Display the
bounding box in the image capture. Valid
options are 0 or 1 for off and on, respectively.
By default, the bounding box is not shown.

4. Save the file.

5. Navigate to the directory of the clearance product.

6. Using a text editor, open the Clearance.cfgproduct file.

7. For ProductInputFile=, type the file name and full path to the data you want to analyze.

Example:
ProductInputFile=c:\fishing_reel.jt

8. If you want to set any of the analysis options differently for a particular clearance product, copy the
settings from the Clearance.cfgglobal file into the Clearance.cfgproduct file.

9. Save the file.

Analyze clearance products from the Clearance Work Area

1. Navigate to a product folder within the Clearance Work Area.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-31


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

2. Right-click the Clearance.cfgproduct file and choose Analyze Product.

-or-

At the command prompt, type

analyze_product.pl

The product data is analyzed and a clearance results file is generated.

Set up end item batch calculation for managed products

Use the following procedure to set up clearance batch calculation on a managed Teamcenter structure
where some subassembly parts (typically the lowest level element in the clearance analysis) are
overridden by an end item (ElementType=EndItem). End items are branches of a product structure
where the root node contains the metadata __PLM_END_ITEM=True. All parts underneath an end item
node are considered to be part of the same monolithic element.

5-32 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Set up end item batch calculation for managed products

1. In the Clearance.cfgglobal file ( ….\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Clearance.cfgglobal), configure the


calculation to run on an end item by defining the ElementType as EndItem.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-33


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

To configure a single product as an end item, configure the Clearance.cfgproduct file for the
specific product.

2. In BMIDE, add a new persistent property to the Item Revision.

3. Create a new Classic List of Value (LOV) and attach the LOV to the property of the Item Revision
created in the previous step.

5-34 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Set up end item batch calculation for managed products

4. Add the True and False values to the LOV.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-35


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

5. Attach the LOV to the Item Revision.

5-36 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Set up end item batch calculation for managed products

6. In Lifecycle Visualization, edit the properties of the Item Revision by setting the enditem to True.

This can also be done in Teamcenter Structure Manager.

7. Set __PLM_END_ITEM=True in the Clearance.cfgglobal file by doing the following.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-37


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

a. Add an additional user attribute using BOMwriter.

b. From the BOMwriter command prompt, type:

: analyze_managed_product.pl <product name>

The BOMwriter utility maps the specified property to the Attribute in the .plmxml file.

c. To verify that the __PLM_END_ITEM property was set to True, open the created .plmxml file in
Lifecycle Visualization.

5-38 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Set up end item batch calculation for managed products

8. Load the batch calculation result into Lifecycle Visualization where you see the end item in the
structure, as well as in the Clearance Results list.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-39


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

Perform clearance analysis using Clearance.exe

Perform a clearance check from the command line, and save your results as a comma-delimited, quote-
enclosed, ASCII text file. (You can also use a Perl script to call Clearance.exe.)

From the command prompt, navigate to the directory containing the clearance executable
(Clearance.exe), and type:

Clearance <input_filename> [options] -f <output filename>

where

This option Does this


-d <value> Specifies the clearance requirement, in model units.
-n Checks clearance using NURBS data (if present in your model).
-c Checks for points of contact and penetration.
-p (Valid with -c option only) Calculates the depth of penetrations.
-t <value> (Valid with -c and -p options only) Specifies the contact tolerance.
-e Automatically sends email messages to owners, as specified in your Clearance Manager
preferences.
-s Shows only error messages as Clearance.exe runs.
-i Creates images as Clearance.exe runs.

Perl scripts for batch clearance analysis

Use the following scripts to manage your products.

Use this script To do this


analyze_managed_product.pl Run clearance analysis on a managed product.
Usage:
analyze_managed_product.pl [<product>]
analyze_managed_product.pl -h
Optional Arguments:
<product>: Product name. Not required if executing within a
product directory.
-h: Display help message.
This script executes two operations in sequence, BOMwriter and
Clearance. The BOMwriter generates a .plmxml file based on the

5-40 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Perl scripts for batch clearance analysis

Use this script To do this


file supplied by the top level assembly itemId or itemKey, revision,
and revision_rule. Clearance uses the .plmxml file as input, and
runs clearance analysis on the whole assembly.
analyze_product.pl Execute batch clearance analysis.
Usage:
analyze_product.pl [<product>]
analyze_product.pl -h
Optional Arguments:
<product>: Product name. Not required if executing within a
product directory.
-h: Display help message.
copy_product.pl Copy a product in the Clearance Work Area.

• Clearance_Work_Area: Local disk only.

• ClearanceDB_Work_Area: Local disk and database.

Usage:
copy_product.pl <from product> <to product>
copy_product.pl -h
Required Arguments:
<from product>: Product name to copy.
<to product>: Name of the new product. Illegal characters are
replaced by \"_\".

Optional Arguments:
-h: Display help message.
create_ClearanceDB_working_dir.pl Create the \"Clearance Work Area\".

• Clearance_Work_Area: Local disk only.

• ClearanceDB_Work_Area: Local disk and database.

Usage:
create_ClearanceDB_working_dir.pl <path> [-df] [-lo]
create_ClearanceDB_working_dir.pl -h
Required Arguments:

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-41


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

Use this script To do this


<path>: An absolute path where the Clearance Work Area will be
created.
Optional Arguments:
-df: Create the default product in the new Clearance Work Area.
-lo: Create a local (no database connection) Clearance Work
Area.
-h: Display help message.
create_default_product.pl Create the \"DEFAULT\" product in the specified directory.
Usage:
create_default_product.pl <path>
create_default_product.pl -h
Required Arguments:
<path>: An absolute path where the Clearance Work Area will be
created.
Optional Arguments:
-h: Display help message.
create_images.pl Creates 2D images of clearance results.
Optional Arguments:
-h: Display help message.
create_product.pl Create a product in the Clearance Work Area.

• Clearance_Work_Area: Local disk only.

• ClearanceDB_Work_Area: Local disk and database.

Usage:
create_product.pl <product> [-uc|-ur|-uz|-ua] [-ds <source>
-cd <conn>]
create_product.pl -h
Required Arguments:
<product>: Product name. First character must be alphanumeric
(0-9, A-Z, a-z). Illegal characters are replaced by \"_\". Enclose
<product> in double quotes (\"\") if it contains spaces.
Optional Arguments:

5-42 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Perl scripts for batch clearance analysis

Use this script To do this


-uc: Copy configuration from the default product to the new
product.
-ur: Copy rules and conditions from the default product to the
new product.
-uz: Copy zones from the default product to the new product.
-ua: Copy all the above from the default product to the new
product.
-ds <data source> -cd <connect data>: Create a local .dbc file.

<source>: <proxy host machine name>:<port>

<conn>: Proxy CONNECT_DATA.

-h: Display help message.


delete_product.pl Delete a product from Clearance Work Area.

• Clearance_Work_Area: Local disk only.

• ClearanceDB_Work_Area: Local disk and database.

Usage:
delete_product.pl <product>
delete_product.pl -h
Required Arguments:
<product>: Product name to delete.
Optional Arguments:
-h: Display help message.
list_all_products.pl List all products.

• Clearance_Work_Area: Local disk only.

• ClearanceDB_Work_Area: Local disk and database.

Usage:
list_all_products.pl [<file>] | [<host> <port> <connect data>]
list_all_products.pl -h
Optional Arguments:

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 5-43


© 2024 Siemens
5. Performing the analysis

Use this script To do this


<file>: .dbc file. <file> can include an absolute path. If <file> is
not passed, then the .dbc file in the current directory is used.
<host> <port> <connect data::

<host>: Machine name where the proxy is running.

<port>: Port number to use.

<connect data>: Name of the proxy CONNECT_DATA.

-h: Display help message.


list_product.pl Report the current state of a product in the database (#issues,
#parts, and last update).
Usage:
list_product.pl [<product>]
list_product.pl -h
Optional Arguments:
<product>: Product name. Not required if executing within a
product directory.
-h: Display help message.
rename_product.pl Rename a product in the Clearance Work Area.

• Clearance_Work_Area: Local disk only.

• ClearanceDB_Work_Area: Local disk and database.

Usage:
rename_product.pl <from product> <to product>
rename_product.pl -h
Required Arguments:
<from product>: Product's old name.
<to product>: Product's new name. Illegal characters are
replaced by \"_\", for the product's new local disk directory name.
Optional Arguments:
-h: Display help message.

5-44 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
6. Updating products in the database
Updating products in the database
Product data, including configurations, rules, conditions, and zones, must be uploaded to the
ClearanceDB database to be available for the analysis. Results of the analysis also must be uploaded
to the database to be available for evaluation in the viewer.

There are two methods available for uploading product data to the database, uploading via the
ClearanceDB Proxy and the Oracle Instant Client, or directly uploading via a full Oracle Client installation.

Configuring ClearanceDB for product updates


You must update the Clearance.cfgglobal file to update the ClearanceDB database with your product
data.

1. Navigate to the ClearanceDB Work Area.

2. Using a text editor, open the Clearance.cfgglobal file.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 6-1


© 2024 Siemens
6. Updating products in the database

3. Change any of the following settings in the Section 3: ClearanceDB update/upload settings section
of the file to configure product updates:
ClearanceDBResultsUploadFile
The name and, optionally, the path of the results file generated by the Clearance Calculator. By
default, the name of this file is ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb.
UploadMethod
The option specifying how to upload data to the ClearanceDB database. You can specify one of
the following:

Proxy — Perform updates using the ClearanceDB Proxy.

Note:
If WEB_SERVICE=True, the script will use the HTTP protocol. Product updates via
HTTP protocol are supported only via the DBC file configurations.

NoProxy — Perform updates using the Oracle Client only.

Note:
To use this option, the full Oracle Client must be installed on the machine from
which you want to make database updates.

OracleSqlLoaderExecutable
The name of the Oracle SQL*Loader executable.

Note:
This is required only if UploadMethod is set to NoProxy.

OracleSqlPlusExecutable
The name of the Oracle SQL*Plus executable.

Note:
This is required only if UploadMethod is set to NoProxy.

ClearanceDBOracleUserCredentials
The Oracle user account information. Type this according to the following syntax:

username/password

6-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Upload product data to the database

Note:
This is required only if UploadMethod is set to NoProxy.

ClearanceDBOracleNetServiceName
The Oracle Net Service Name.

Note:
This is required only if UploadMethod is set to NoProxy.

4. Save the file.

Upload product data to the database


You can upload your product data, including configurations, rules, conditions, zones, images, and
results, to the database.

1. Navigate to the appropriate product directory in your ClearanceDB Work Area.

2. Do any of the following:

To upload Do this
product
attributes
From the Type
command
update_product.pl [<product>] -uc:-ur:-ud:-uz:-ua [-df]
prompt
where

product — is the product name.

Note:
If you run the update_product.pl script from within a product
directory, you do not need to specify the product name that you
want to update. If you run update_product.pl from the root of the
ClearanceDB Work Area, you must specify the product name.

—uc — The argument to upload the configuration.


—ur — The argument to upload the rules and conditions.
—ud — The argument to upload the results.
—uz — The argument to upload the zones.
—ua — The argument to upload all of the product data, including the
configuration, rules and conditions, results, and zones.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 6-3


© 2024 Siemens
6. Updating products in the database

To upload Do this
product
attributes
—df — The argument to upload the default configuration of the product.
—ui — The argument to upload clearance images.

Example:
update_product.pl -ua

From the In the directory, right-click any of the following files and choose Upload to
shortcut ClearanceDB:
menu
• configuration.csvcldb — ClearanceDB process configuration file

• rules.csvcldb — ClearanceDB rules definition file

• conditions.csvcldb — ClearanceDB conditions definition file

• zones.csvcldb — ClearanceDB zones definition file

• ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb — ClearanceDB results file

Your data is uploaded to the database and log files are created and saved to the product directory.

Upload data using the ClearanceDbClient


You can use the ClearanceDbClient application to upload product configurations, rules, conditions,
zones, and analysis results to the database.

1. Open a command line window and navigate to the ...\Siemens\Teamcenter {current version}
\Visualization\Products\Mockup directory.

2. At the command prompt, type:

ClearanceDbClient -[file type] [file path] -q [DBC file path] -l [log


file path]

This parameter Represents


file type The option for the file type you want to upload to the database.

6-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Upload data using the ClearanceDbClient

This parameter Represents

Use this
value To upload these types of files
-uc Configuration files (Configuration.csv)
-ur Rules and conditions (Rules.csv and Conditions.csv)
-uz Zones (Zones.csv)
-ud Results (ClearanceResultsDbUpload.dat)

file path The path to the .csv file containing the data you want to upload.

Note:
• The file path must be enclosed in quotation marks.

• The rules option requires two .csv file paths, the rules .csv
file path followed by the conditions .csv file path.

Example:
ClearanceDBClient -ur "C:\Rules.csv"
"C:\Conditions.csv" -q
"C:\sfdver08.dbc" -l "C:\log.txt"

-q The DBC file option.


DBC file path The path to a properly constructed DBC file.

Note:
The file path must be enclosed in quotation marks.

-l The log file option.


log file path The path where you want to save the log file.

Note:
The file path must be enclosed in quotation marks.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 6-5


© 2024 Siemens
6. Updating products in the database

Example:
ClearanceDBClient -uc "C:\Configuration.csv" -q "C:\sfdver08.dbc" -l
"C:\log.txt"

Merging results with the database


For visualization clients to access analysis results, you must upload and merge the
ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb file with your database.

1. Navigate to the appropriate product directory in your ClearanceDB Work Area.

2. Do any of the following:

To merge product Do this


attributes
From the command Type
prompt
update_product.pl [<product>] [-ud] [-df]

Example:
update_product.pl fishing_reel -ud

From the shortcut In the ClearanceDB_Work_Area\ Products\product_name directory,


menu right-click the ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb file and choose
Upload to ClearanceDB.

6-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
7. Using Mockup to view and manage
Clearance results
Viewing and managing results overview
ClearanceDB results evaluation and issue management occurs within the viewer. Supported visualization
clients include standalone Mockup, the Lifecycle Viewer, and Structure Manager.

Viewing clearance issues and changing their status within the viewer consists of the following activities:

• Use the clearance preferences within the viewer to enable access to the ClearanceDB database

• Load and view results from the database

• Use optional server-side filters to obtain an additional level of control over which results are loaded
into the viewer

• Understand the different types of potential clearance violations

• Display the clearance issue status

• Analyze clearance issues with multiple occurrences

• Update the clearance issue status in the database

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 7-1


© 2024 Siemens
7. Using Mockup to view and manage Clearance results

Enable ClearanceDB within the viewer


You must enable ClearanceDB functionality within the viewer to evaluate database results.

1. In the viewer, choose Analysis tab→Clearance group→Enable Clearance Analysis .

2. In the Clearance group, choose Clearance Preferences →Requirement Components.

3. In the Requirement Rule Components dialog box, select Requirement Rules from ClearanceDB
Server.

4. In the Clearance group, choose Clearance Preferences →Result Components.

5. In the Result Components dialog box, select one of these options:

Use To enable this


General Visual representation of results within the application. Select this option if you
Clearance only want to view and manage ClearanceDB results from the database.
Results
ClearanceDB Results upload to the Oracle database. Select this option if you want to perform
Results analysis locally within Mockup, and then upload the results to the database.

Note:
To upload results to the database from the viewer, the following
environment variables must be set:

EAI_CL_CONNECT_DATA — The proxy connection name


EAI_CL_DATASOURCE — The ClearanceDB Proxy system name and
port number
EAI_CL_UPLOAD_FILE — A name for the ClearanceDB results file

To use HTTP-based communication protocol, the following additional


environment variables must be set:

EAI_CL_WEB_SERVICE — Enable HTTP-based Communication


protocol for ClearanceDB.
EAI_CL_CLEARANCE_APPID — Application id defined in the TcSS
Application Registry.
EAI_CL_SSO_SERVICE_LOGIN_URL — URL used by the TcSS
solution for single sign-on.
EAI_CL_WEB_SERVICE_URL — HTTP or HTTPS web service URL
used by ClearanceDB.

7-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Load ClearanceDB results in the viewer

6. Click OK.

Load ClearanceDB results in the viewer


1. In the viewer, open the 3D model that has product data and associated ClearanceDB results in the
database.

2. Choose Analysis tab→Clearance group→Load Results→Load Results .

The Load Clearance Results dialog box appears.

3. In the Load Clearance Results dialog box, select ClearanceDB DataBase Connection (*.DBC)
from the Files of type list.

4. Select your Database Connection (DBC) file, and click Open.

If there are ClearanceDB results associated with the model in the database, they appear in the
Results list.

Display clearance issue status


The database extensions to the viewer allow the end user to load the clearance results from the
database via a Database Connection (DBC) file. Once the results are displayed in the viewer, the end user
can evaluate clearance issues and then update their status in the database.

The end user can trace the status of the database content and its relationship to the client by examining
the following clearance view fields:

• Db Sync — Indicates whether there are uncommitted changes to clearance attributes (Yes/No),
or whether the clearance issue stored in the database can be matched with currently opened JT
document (Yes/<blank>).

• Db Modified On — Contains the date of the last change to user dispositions.

• Db Modified By — Contains the OS login name of the user who committed changes to user
dispositions last.

• Db Message — Gives verbose indication of the status of the clearance issue.

• Db Change — Indicates changes in the product, issues, and its dispositions.

• Db Rules — Displays the numbers of the violated clearance requirement rules.

• Db Rule Descriptions — Displays the descriptions of the violated clearance requirement rules.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 7-3


© 2024 Siemens
7. Using Mockup to view and manage Clearance results

• Db Match — Displays the occurrence type for each issue:

• I (Identical)

All identical issues in a group are linked when the inheritance process is executed in the database.
The master issue (the one that the others are linked to) is the one that was most recently changed.

• S (Similar)

All similar issues in a group share a common baseline issue, which is the one that was most recently
changed. When the baseline issue is dispositioned, the information in the baseline issue is copied
to the other issues in the same group. This copy operation happens only once, and future changes
affect only that issue.

• R (Resembling)

Same as similar, except the issues are marked as not evaluated in the database. This typically means
that someone must investigate and evaluate the issue.

• X

The issue is unrelated.

• Db Base — Displays the base issue for similar and resembling occurrences. The column is blank for
identical occurrences.

• Db Issue — Displays the database issue number for each issue. For identical occurrences, this number
will be the same.

• Db Issue Count — Displays the number of issues in each identical group. For similar, resembling, and
unrelated occurrences, this is always 1.

Note:
All of the above fields are read only.

Update issue status database from the viewer


1. In the viewer, right-click an issue in the Results list, and change any of the following settings:

• Set Owner

• Set Status

• Set Priority

7-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Update issue status database from the viewer

• Set Zone

• Enter Resolution

If your ClearanceDB configuration is set to Autocommit mode, database updates are triggered by
changes to any of the above values.

2. (If not in Autocommit mode) Right-click an issue in the Results list, and select Commit.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 7-5


© 2024 Siemens
7. Using Mockup to view and manage Clearance results

7-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
8. Attributes
Overview of ClearanceDB product attributes
ClearanceDB enables you to analyze multiple product configurations, including variants, control models,
or revisions of a single product or product family. A product is identified by the name of the highest level
node in the assembly (the root node). A product configuration is identified by configuration metadata at
this top assembly node. If configuration metadata is not present at this node, the DEFAULT configuration
values are used.

The ClearanceDB process configuration (defined in the configuration.csvcldb file) and rule model
(defined in the rules.csvcldb and conditions.csvcldb files) are shared among product configurations. The
ClearanceDB zone model is specific to a single configuration, defined in the "Configuration Name" field of
the zones.csvcldb file.

The Clearance Calculator must be run for all product configurations separately. Clearance results are
stored individually for each configuration. They are queried only for the configuration of the currently
opened top level assembly node as defined by the configuration metadata of that node. However, a user
disposition assigned in one configuration will be applied to all remaining configurations where results
are present. The match is based on the CADIDs of the parts associated with the results. Because of this,
the uniqueness of the CADIDs in the product structure is essential.

The clearance management process and the Clearance database behavior can be customized via a
number of attributes. These attributes are defined by product by pairs of attribute name and attribute
value. Some of the configuration attributes can have a single value, some can have multiple values.
These configuration attributes are defined in the configuration.csvcldb file.

ClearanceDB product attributes reference


You can configure the ClearanceDB process for each of your products. A product configuration is defined
in the configuration.csvcldb file, and then uploaded to the database.

Use the following attributes to define ClearanceDB product configurations:

Use this attribute To do this


EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE Store part metadata essential to the clearance
management process in the database.
EAICL_GEOMETRY_CHANGE_PART Use part metadata to indicate model design changes.
_ATTRIBUTE
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER Turn on the initial clearance owner assignment.
_ASSIGNMENT

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 8-1


© 2024 Siemens
8. Attributes

Use this attribute To do this


EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER Specify the metadata used for the initial clearance
_CHOICE owner assignment.
INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE Specify the metadata used to determine the initial
_CRITERION clearance owner assignment.
INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_SEARCH Specify how product structure is searched for the
_METHOD metadata used for the initial clearance owner
assignment.
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_PRIORITY Specify an initial clearance issue priority value.
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_STATUS Specify an initial clearance issue status value.
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_COMMENT Specify an initial clearance issue comment value.
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_IMPORTANT Specify an initial clearance issue important value.
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE Specify an initial clearance issue change required
_REQUIRED value.
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE Specify an initial clearance issue change reference
_REFERENCE value.
EAICL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE_DETECTION Specify the change detection method.
EAICL_CLEARANCE_DISPOSITION Specify how you want to persist user dispositions of
_PERSISTENCE clearance owner, status, priority, comment and zone.
EAICL_PART_MATCHING_METHOD Specify the part reconciliation method.
EAICL_PART_NAME_PROPER Specify the part property which identifies metadata
uniquely.
EAICL_RULES_PART_ATTRIBUTE Turn on incremental clearance analysis.
EAICL_OCCURRENCE_KEY Turn on part occurrence persistence by specified
metadata.
EAICL_CHANGE_HISTORY_COLUMN Specify the information to include in Issue Change
History reports.
EAICL_PRESERVE_RESOLVED_ISSUES Specify to track a history of ClearanceDB issues.
EAICL_PRODUCT_HISTORY_MAX_ENTRIES Specify the maximum number of ClearanceDB history
issues.
EAICL_PRODUCT_HISTORY_RETENTION Specify how long to store database events.
_DAYS
EAICL_PRODUCT_STRUCTURE_CHANGE Track changes in the product structure size.
_TEST

8-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE

Use this attribute To do this


EAICL_PRODUCT_STRUCTURE_CHANGE Specify the relative change in the product structure,
_REJECTION_PERCENT between the old and new product snapshot, above
which the clearance result upload will be rejected.
EAICL_RULEBASE_CHANGE_TEST Specify to track changes in the size of the clearance
requirement rulebase.
EAICL_RULEBASE_CHANGE_REJECTION Define the relative change in the clearance
_PERCENT requirement rulebase, between the old and new
product snapshot, above which the clearance
requirement rulebase upload will be rejected.
EAICL_TMP_OBJECT_CLEANUP_AGE_IN Clean up session-specific database objects older than a
_DAYS specified duration.
EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE When configuring issue inheritance, specify the criteria
that reports issues as identical.
EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE When configuring issue inheritance, specify the criteria
that reports issues as similar.
EAICL_RESEMBLING_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE When configuring issue inheritance, specify the criteria
that reports issues as resembling.
EAICL_MATCHING_CRITERIA_NUMERIC When configuring issue inheritance, specify the
_PRECISION tolerance for numeric criteria in determining whether
values are matching.

EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE
Use the EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE attribute to define the set of model metadata item names at
the assembly or part level that are pertinent to the interference/clearance management process. You can
have multiple instances of the EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE attribute in a configuration.csvcldb
file, each with a different value.

Example:
fishing_reel,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,Translation Date
fishing_reel,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,eaiclRULES
fishing_reel,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,LastModified
fishing_reel,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,OWNER
fishing_reel,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,LastModified
fishing_reel,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,SafetyClass

Metadata typically stored in the database falls into three categories:

• Metadata indicating a possible change in part geometry.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 8-3


© 2024 Siemens
8. Attributes

Example:
The value of the EAICL_GEOMETRY_CHANGE_PART_ATTRIBUTE attribute. For example,
Translation Date.

• Metadata referenced by clearance requirement rules.

Example:
For example, SafetyClass.

• Metadata used to determine the owner of an issue.

Example:
The value of the EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE and
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE_CRITERION attributes. For example,
OWNER for EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE and LastModified for
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE_CRITERION.

Note:
For space and performance considerations, only the metadata defined by the
EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE attribute is saved in the database.

EAICL_GEOMETRY_CHANGE_PART_ATTRIBUTE
Use the EAICL_GEOMETRY_CHANGE_PART_ATTRIBUTE attribute to define the metadata the change of
which indicates a possible change in part geometry. For example, Translation Date. This configuration
attribute requires a unique value.

EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_ASSIGNMENT
Use the EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_ASSIGNMENT attribute to turn on the
initial clearance owner assignment. Enable the option by including the
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_ASSIGNMENT attribute in the configuration.csvcldb file and setting
it to ON. The default value of EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_ASSIGNMENT is OFF.

Note:
When using the initial clearance owner assignment option,
you also need to include the EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE,
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE_CRITERION, and

8-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE

EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_SEARCH_METHOD attributes, along with appropriate settings,


in the configuration.csvcldb file.

EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE
Use the EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE attribute to specify the metadata you want to you
for the initial clearance owner assignment. For example, OWNER.

EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE_CRITERION
Use the EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE_CRITERION attribute to specify how the initial
clearance owner is assigned. The EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE value of the part with
the larger EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE_CRITERION value is assigned as the owner. For
example, LastModified.

EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_SEARCH_METHOD
Use the EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_SEARCH_METHOD attribute to specify how the product
structure is searched for the EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE metadata.

Valid settings for this attribute include the following:

• 1 — Only the parts are searched.

• 2 — The parts and possibly the (parent) assemblies are searched.

• 3 — Only the (parent) assemblies are searched.

If the specified metadata is not found it is assigned a value of "Unknown."

EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_PRIORITY
Define the clearance issue priority value initially assigned by the database. This value should match the
configuration of Mockup installations.

EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_STATUS
Define the clearance issue status value initially assigned by the database. This value should match the
configuration of Mockup installations.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 8-5


© 2024 Siemens
8. Attributes

EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_COMMENT
Define the clearance issue Comment value initially assigned by the database. This value should match
the configuration of Mockup installations.

EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_IMPORTANT
Define the clearance issue Important value initially assigned by the database. This value should match
the configuration of Mockup installations.

EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE_REQUIRED
Define the clearance issue Change Required value initially assigned by the database. This value should
match the configuration of Mockup installations.

EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE_REFERENCE
Define the clearance issue Change Reference value initially assigned by the database. This value should
match the configuration of Mockup installations.

EAICL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE_DETECTION
Use the EAICL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE_DETECTION attribute to specify the change detection method. The
supported values are below:

Use this To do this


Model Inputs Determines change on the basis of model inputs. This is the default value.
These are the available model inputs:

1. Geometry: The geometry for one or both parts has changed.

2. Transform: A transform has been applied to one or both parts.

3. Requirement: The requirement for this pair has changed (possibly due
to a rule change).

4. Variant condition. A variant condition affecting this pair has changed.


Analysis Outputs Determines change on the basis of outputs.
These are the available analysis outputs:

1. Result: The distance between the element pair (negative if they are
penetrating).

8-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
EAICL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE_DETECTION

Use this To do this


2. Type: Contact, penetration, distance, thickness, or unknown.

3. Location: The geometric center of the penetrating region(s).

4. Orientation: The extraction vector for the result.

5. Intersection volume: The intersection volume.

6. Requirement: The requirement for this pair (as calculated from the
rules).

7. Violation tolerance: The difference between the requirement and


result.

When using EAICL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE_DETECTION=”Analysis Outputs”,


the following parameters are used to determine tolerances for detecting
a change. Omitting a given tolerance, or specifying a value of -1, means
that no test on this value will be performed, so any change of any size
for a missing item will be completely ignored. Specifying a value of 0.0 for
numeric tolerances means that there is no tolerance, so any deviation in a
subsequent analysis will be detected as a change.

Note:
You must specify at least one tolerance value or
eaicl_result_clearance_type_change when using the Analysis Outputs
option.

EAICL_RESULT_CHANGE_ TOLERANCE Clearance result. Positive number. Expressed in


model units.

EAICL_RESULT_CLEARANCE_ Clearance type. YES or NO. YES means change in


TYPE_CHANGE type is not detected as a change. NO means change
in type IS detected as a change.

EAICL_RESULT_POSITION_ Either part has moved. Positive number. Expressed


CHANGE_TOLERANCE in model units.

EAICL_RESULT_ORIENTATION_ Either part has been rotated. Positive number.


CHANGE_TOLERANCE Expressed in degrees.

EAICL_RESULT_INTERSECTION_ Volume of the intersection between parts. Positive


VOLUME_CHANGE_TOLERANCE number. Expressed in model units cubed.

EAICL_RESULT_REQUIREMENT_ Change in requirement. Positive number. Expressed


CHANGE_TOLERANCE in model units.

EAICL_RESULT_VIOLATION_ Difference between requirement and result. Positive


CHANGE_TOLERANCE number. Expressed in model units.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 8-7


© 2024 Siemens
8. Attributes

Use this To do this

Note:
The default for all of these new tolerance parameters is “OFF”.

Note:
Synonyms for the values of the existing EAICL_CLEARANCE_DISPOSITION_PERSISTENCE parameter
are supported in this release for the sake of clarity. Both the existing values and the new synonyms
are supported as exact equivalents.

• Preserve Issue on Change


New value. Synonym for the existing value eaiclCADID.

• New Issue on Change


New value. Synonym for the existing value eaiclCHANGE.

EAICL_CLEARANCE_DISPOSITION_PERSISTENCE
Use the EAICL_CLEARANCE_DISPOSITION_PERSISTENCE attribute to control how the database persists
user dispositions of clearance owner, status, priority, comment, and zone. Options are eaiclCADID and
eaiclCHANGE.

If the value is set to eaiclCADID then the user dispositions are persisted as long as the issue defined by
a relationship between two part instances, in turn defined by their CADIDs, exists. In other words, the
changes in shape or location of the parts causing a clearance issue do not reset user dispositions to their
initial values. However, a possible reassignment of parts to different subassemblies or disappearance and
subsequent reemergence of the issue does cause the re-initialization of clearance owner, status, priority,
comment, and zone.

If its value is set to eaiclCHANGE then the values of clearance owner, status, priority, comment, and zone
are initialized each time there are changes in either shape or location of the parts causing a clearance
issue.

EAICL_PART_MATCHING_METHOD
Use the EAICL_PART_MATCHING_METHOD attribute to control the method of part reconciliation. Options
are eaiclCADID and eaiclSPATIAL.

The parts of the old and new product snapshot are reconciled based strictly on CADIDs (part names and
instance numbers) when EAICL_PART_MATCHING_METHOD is set to eaiclCADID.

8-8 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
EAICL_PART_NAME_PROPER

The parts of the old and new product snapshot are reconciled based on proper part names and spatial
considerations when EAICL_PART_MATCHING_METHOD is set to eaiclSPATIAL. This method provides
better matches when the product structure changes. However, it may result in mis-matches and thus in
new clearance issues when same objects occupy the same space in the model.

Note:
You also can use NGID data for part reconciliation. If EAICL_OCCURRENCE_KEY is
set to eaiclNGID, ClearanceDB always uses NGIDs to reconcile product structure. The
EAICL_PART_MATCHING_METHOD attribute is disregarded.

EAICL_PART_NAME_PROPER
Define the part property which identifies metadata uniquely. The eaiclPART value should be specified
when only one version of a part is referenced by the product, the eaiclDATASTORE should be specified
otherwise.

EAICL_RULES_PART_ATTRIBUTE
Enable incremental clearance analysis. This must be set to eaiclRULES to enable this functionality.
Additionally, eaiclRULES must be configured as a relevant part attribute.

EAICL_OCCURRENCE_KEY
Use the EAICL_OCCURENCE_KEY attribute to define how ClearanceDB stores references to product
structure occurrences involved in clearance issues. Options are eaiclCADID, eaiclNGID, or any metadata
that consists of unique identifiers. The default value of EAICL_OCCURRENCE_KEY is eaiclCADID.

Use this To do this


eaiclCADID Use CADIDs associated with your model to keep track of part
occurrences in the ClearanceDB database.
eaiclNGID Use NGIDs associated with your model to keep track of part
occurrences in the ClearanceDB database.

Note:
• If you set EAICL_OCCURRENCE_KEY to eaiclNGID, ClearanceDB
always uses NGIDs to reconcile product structure, regardless of
how the EAICL_PART_MATCHING_METHOD attribute is set.

• When adopting NGID strings for a product, if the product


structure is already stored in the database the CADID strings
of the part occurrences must be unique.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 8-9


© 2024 Siemens
8. Attributes

Use this To do this


• For product structure that already exists in the database,
change the EAICL_OCCURRENCE_KEY to eaiclNGID and then
perform analysis. You can then upload results with NGID data
to the database.

• Once NGID-based product structure persistence and resolution


is adopted for a product, you cannot change back to the
product's original identifiers.

• Product structure that does not resolve unambiguously is not


committed to the database. Such products should use the
legacy spatial method of product structure reconciliation.

• For products configured to use NGID-based product structure


encoding, ClearanceDB Server 2007.1 and later releases do not
support earlier ClearanceDB client applications.

Metadata that consists of Use metadata associated with your model to keep track of part
unique identifiers occurrences in the ClearanceDB database.

Example:
__APPR_PATH_NODE or __PLM_ABSOCC_UID are used for models
that originate from a Teamcenter repository.

EAICL_CHANGE_HISTORY_COLUMN
Specify the information to include in Issue Change History reports. You can include any of the following
information:

Note:
These values are case and space-sensitive.

• Comment

• Important

• Owner

• Priority

• Requirement

8-10 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
EAICL_PRESERVE_RESOLVED_ISSUES

• Result

• Db Rule Descriptions

• Db Rule Names

• Status

• Type

• Zone

• Change Reference

• Change Required

EAICL_PRESERVE_RESOLVED_ISSUES
Use the EAICL_PRESERVE_RESOLVED_ISSUES attribute to for greater control over the existing history
behavior.

If set to No, resolved issues are deleted. If an issue recurs, it is treated as new, with a new clearance issue
ID.

If set to Yes, resolved issues disappear, but are not deleted. If an issue recurs, it is included in reports
with the prior issue ID.

Valid values are listed below:

Use this To do this


Yes Resolved issues are preserved.
No Resolved issues are not preserved. This setting is the default behavior.

EAICL_PRESERVE_RESOLVED_ISSUES can be changed after the product is created, with the following
results:

• Changing from No to Yes: Resolved issues will be preserved from the point in time the configuration
is applied to the product in the database. Issues resolved prior to the change, along with any issue
history, will not be available; thus, a newly recurring issue will be seen as new the first time it is
loaded after the change in parameter. The issue history for unresolved issues will still be maintained
according to specified EAICL_CHANGE_HISTORY_COLUMN values.

• Changing from Yes to No: Upon uploading of this parameter to the database, existing resolved issues
and any history will be deleted. Future resolved issues and history will no longer be maintained.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 8-11


© 2024 Siemens
8. Attributes

The existing configuration parameter EAICL_PRODUCT_HISTORY_RETENTION (off by default) can be used


to specify the maximum age, in days, for issue history (but not the issue itself) to be maintained, for
both active and resolved issues. It can be omitted or set to -1, in which case no purging on basis of age
will be performed. When changed and uploaded, it will purge issue history as needed.

EAICL_PRODUCT_HISTORY_MAX_ENTRIES
Use this attribute to specify the maximum number of product history entries to maintain for
both active and resolved issues. If not included in the product configuration, or set to a value
of -1, no deletion of history entries is performed. This attribute is used in conjunction with
EAICL_PRODUCT_HISTORY_RETENTION_DAYS.

Issue history for currently resolved issues is not available in Mockup reports.

A formerly resolved issue that recurs is viewed as an active issue, with its history available for reporting
within Mockup just as with any other issue.

Previously-resolved issues that recur with EAICL_PRESERVE_RESOLVED_ISSUES set to TRUE generate a


history entry indicating the restoration of the issue to the list of active issues. The history entries
indicating this restoration are visible in Mockup history reports.

EAICL_PRODUCT_HISTORY_RETENTION_DAYS
Define the period of time the database events are persisted, in days. For example, a value of 365 equals
a one year retention period.

This attribute is used in conjunction with EAICL_PRODUCT_HISTORY_MAX_ENTRIES.

EAICL_PRODUCT_STRUCTURE_CHANGE_TEST
Specify whether to track changes in the size of the product structure. Valid settings for this attribute are
ON or OFF.

EAICL_PRODUCT_STRUCTURE_CHANGE_REJECTION_PERCENT
Define the relative change in the product structure, between the old and new product snapshot, above
which the clearance result upload will be rejected. Use any value from 1-100.

EAICL_RULEBASE_CHANGE_TEST
Specify whether to track changes in the size of the clearance requirement rulebase. Valid settings for this
attribute are ON or OFF.

8-12 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
EAICL_RULEBASE_CHANGE_REJECTION_PERCENT

EAICL_RULEBASE_CHANGE_REJECTION_PERCENT
Define the relative change in the product structure, between the old and new product snapshot, above
which the clearance result upload will be rejected. Use any value from 1-100.

EAICL_TMP_OBJECT_CLEANUP_AGE_IN_DAYS
Define the amount of time before obsolete objects are automatically deleted from the database.
ClearanceDB cleans up session-specific database objects older than this value to prevent objects that
are “orphaned” by disconnected sessions from cluttering the database. You can use this parameter for a
particular product or for the DEFAULT product.

The unit of time is days, and the default value is 0.01 (0.01 days = 14.4 minutes). In normal usage, the
default value of 0.01 is sufficient. However, in situations involving high network latency and retrieval
of large numbers of clearance results, an ORA-00954 error may result from the premature removal of
a session’s objects. Increasing this value will prevent this error from occurring. Note that the specified
value cannot be smaller than 0.01.

EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE
Use the EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE attribute in the ALL product to specify the criteria that
reports issues as identical. Identical issues are linked to common clearance issues when the inheritance
process is executed in the database. The master issue (the one that the others are linked to) is the one
that was most recently changed.

Example:
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,Part Name

ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,Part Number

ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,eaiclRESULT

Use the EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE and EAICL_RESEMBLING_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE


attributes to define similar and resembling issues. Attributes in similar and resembling issues are copied.

Including any of these three attributes in the ALL product configuration, activates the issue inheritance
mechanism that analyzes issues in the entire database for inheritance relationships.

You can configure which attributes are shared between identical issues, defining which attributes
are included in the issue and which are included in the issue occurrence. To do this, add the
EAICL_IDENTICAL_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_SHARE attribute to the configuration file.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 8-13


© 2024 Siemens
8. Attributes

Example:
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_SHARE,Owner

ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_SHARE,Priority

ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_SHARE,Status

ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_SHARE,Comment

Use the EAICL_MATCHING_CRITERIA_NUMERIC_PRECISION attribute to specify the tolerance for numeric


criteria in determining whether values are matching.

EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE
Use the EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE attribute in the ALL product to specify the criteria that
reports issues as similar. Similar issues share a common baseline issue, which is the one that was
most recently changed. When the baseline issue is dispositioned, the information in the baseline issue
is copied to the other issues in the same group. This copy operation happens only once, and future
changes affect only that issue.

Example:
ALL,EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,Part Name

ALL,EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,eaiclRESULT

ALL,EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,eaiclRELXFORM

Use the EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE and EAICL_RESEMBLING_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE


attributes to define identical and resembling issues.

Including any of these three attributes in the ALL product configuration, activates the issue inheritance
mechanism that analyzes issues in the entire database for inheritance relationships.

You can configure which attributes are copied between similar issues. To do this, add the
EAICL_SIMILAR_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY attribute to the configuration file.

Example:
ALL,EAICL_SIMILAR_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY,Owner

ALL,EAICL_SIMILAR_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY,Priority

8-14 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
EAICL_RESEMBLING_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE

ALL,EAICL_SIMILAR_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY,Status

Use the EAICL_MATCHING_CRITERIA_NUMERIC_PRECISION attribute to specify the tolerance for numeric


criteria in determining whether values are matching.

EAICL_RESEMBLING_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE
Use the EAICL_RESEMBLING_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE attribute in the ALL product to specify the criteria
that reports issues as resembling. Resembling issues share a common baseline issue, which is the
one that was most recently changed. When the baseline issue is dispositioned, the information in the
baseline issue is copied to the other issues in the same group. This copy operation happens only once,
and future changes affect only that issue.

Resembling issues are marked as not evaluated in the database. This typically means that you must
investigate and evaluate the issue.

Example:
ALL,EAICL_RESEMBLING_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,Part Name

ALL,EAICL_RESEMBLING_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,eaiclRESULT

Use the EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE and EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE attributes


to define identical and similar issues.

Including any of these three attributes in the ALL product configuration, activates the issue inheritance
mechanism that analyzes issues in the entire database for inheritance relationships.

You can configure which attributes are copied between resembling issues. To do this, add the
EAICL_RESEMBLING_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY attribute to the configuration file.

Example:
ALL,EAICL_RESEMBLING_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY,Owner

ALL,EAICL_RESEMBLING_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY,Priority

ALL,EAICL_RESEMBLING_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY,Status

Use the EAICL_MATCHING_CRITERIA_NUMERIC_PRECISION attribute to specify the tolerance for numeric


criteria in determining whether values are matching.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 8-15


© 2024 Siemens
8. Attributes

EAICL_MATCHING_CRITERIA_NUMERIC_PRECISION
Use the EAICL_MATCHING_CRITERIA_NUMERIC_PRECISION attribute to specify the tolerance for numeric
criteria in determining whether values are matching.

For numeric criteria, such as a clearance result or clearance volume, a tolerance can be
specified so that the values do not need to match exactly in order to be considered a
match. To accomplish this goal, the use of numeric precision, rather than numeric tolerance
is adopted. The precision is expressed in the number of significant digits. For example, for
ALL,EAICL_MATCHING_CRITERIA_NUMERIC_PRECISION,3, number 123,456,789 is treated as
1.23E8. If a tolerance value is not specified for a numerical attribute, the tolerance is 0, meaning an
exact match is required.

The default value of EAICL_MATCHING_CRITERIA_NUMERIC_PRECISION is the full (double) precision: 15.

Upload product attributes to the database


In order to create a ClearanceDB product and associate product attributes with it, you must upload the
configuration.csvcldb file with the database.

1. Navigate to the appropriate product directory in your ClearanceDB Work Area.

2. Do any of the following:

To upload product Do this


attributes
From the command Type
prompt
update_product.pl [<product>] [-uc] [-df]

Example:
update_product.pl fishing_reel -uc

(Windows) From the In the product directory, right-click the configuration.csvcldb file and
shortcut menu choose Upload to ClearanceDB.

Example configuration file


An example of a configuration.csvcldb file is shown below.

A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,Sequence
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,OWNER
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,LastModified
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,DesignationEnglish

8-16 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Example configuration file

A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,FullPath
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,PartNumber
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,PartsType
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,eaiclRULES
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_GEOMETRY_CHANGE_PART_ATTRIBUTE,Sequence
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_CLEARANCE_DISPOSITION_PERSISTENCE,eaiclCADID
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE,OWNER
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE_CRITERION,LastModified
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_ASSIGNMENT,ON
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_SEARCH_METHOD,1
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_UNKNOWN,Unknown
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_PRIORITY,None
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_STATUS,Not Evaluated
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_IMPORTANT,Yes
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE_REQUIRED,No
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_CHANGE_REFERENCE,
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_COMMENT,
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_PART_MATCHING_METHOD,eaiclSPATIAL
A-728AIRCRAFT,EAICL_RULES_PART_ATTRIBUTE,eaiclRULES

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 8-17


© 2024 Siemens
8. Attributes

8-18 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
9. Issue inheritance
Inheritance overview
More than one instance of the same violating part pairs may exist in your clearance results. Inheritance
relationships can be defined in your database so that these issues are not always duplicated but
instead are managed based on their level of similarity. Membership in a specific inheritance category
determines to what degree they share clearance issue attributes and dispositions. For example, if an
issue meets the criteria for being Identical, the issue is shared between occurrences and appears only
once in the clearance results. If the issue is later updated or changed, all part occurrences reference the
same, updated version of the issue. Also, if these part pair occurrences exist in different products, they
can share the same issue. The attributes of Similar and Resembling issues are shared to a lesser degree
and are handled differently from Identical issues, as explained below.

1. In the Results list, review the issue occurrences.

The Db Match, Db Base, Db Issue, Db Issue Count columns provide information about the
occurrences.

Three different levels of similarity may be defined for your database, and they appear in the results
lists with different symbols, as follows:

Note:
Unrelated issues appear with the symbol.

• Identical

Identical issues are linked when the inheritance process is executed in the database. The master
issue (the one that the others are linked to) is the one that was most recently changed.

• Similar

Similar issues share a common baseline issue, which is the one that was most recently changed.
When the baseline issue is dispositioned, the information in the baseline issue is copied to the
other issues in the same group. This copy operation happens only once, and future changes
affect only that issue.

• Resembling

Same as similar, except the issues are marked as not evaluated in the database. This typically
means that you must investigate and evaluate the issue.

2. To group issues by element pair, right-click a column heading, and choose Group Tree by
Elements.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 9-1


© 2024 Siemens
9. Issue inheritance

3. On the Clearance Results toolbar, click Show/Hide Occurrences Window .

A window appears below the Clearance Results window, providing details about the selected
occurrence.

4. Select other issues in the Results list to view the details for the occurrences.

Configuring the ALL product for issue inheritance

Set up the ALL product for issue inheritance

More than one instance of the same violating part pairs may exist in your clearance results. Inheritance
relationships can be defined in your database so that these issues are not duplicated but instead are
occurrences that reference the same shared object.

To configure issue inheritance, you define the ALL product. The configuration settings in this product
apply to all products in the database.

1. Follow the steps to create a new ClearanceDB product, typing this in the command prompt:

create_product.pl ALL

2. Manually create configuration.csvcldb in the ALL product directory and add the appropriate
configuration attributes.

• EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE

• EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE

• EAICL_RESEMBLING_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE

• EAICL_MATCHING_CRITERIA_NUMERIC_PRECISION

3. (Optional) Define groups for issue inheritance.

Define groups for the ALL product

When you configure issue inheritance you can define criteria groups, so that a match of all the
attributes of any of the groups cause the result to be linked to the common clearance issue.

Additional clearance groups include a digit following the matching type. Group 1 has no digit, group 2
requires 1, group 3 requires 2, and so on.

In this example, if all parameters of group 1 match, or if all parameters of group 2 match, then the issues
match.

9-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Example configuration file for the ALL product

# Identical matching attributes – Group 1


ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,Part Name
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,Part Number
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,eaiclRESULT

# Identical matching attributes – Group 2


ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE1,Part Name
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE1,Part Number
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE1,eaiclRELXFORM

Example configuration file for the ALL product

An example of a configuration.csvcldb file for the ALL product is shown here.

ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,Part Name
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,Part Number
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,eaiclRESULT
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE1,Part Name
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE1,Part Number
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE1,eaiclRELXFORM
ALL,EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,Part Name
ALL,EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,eaiclRESULT
ALL,EAICL_SIMILAR_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,eaiclRELXFORM
ALL,EAICL_RESEMBLING_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,Part Name
ALL,EAICL_RESEMBLING_MATCHING_ATTRIBUTE,eaiclRESULT
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_SHARE,Owner
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_SHARE,Priority
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_SHARE,Status
ALL,EAICL_IDENTICAL_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_SHARE,Comment
ALL,EAICL_SIMILAR_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY,Owner
ALL,EAICL_SIMILAR_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY,Priority
ALL,EAICL_SIMILAR_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY,Status
ALL,EAICL_RESEMBLING_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY,Owner
ALL,EAICL_RESEMBLING_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY,Priority
ALL,EAICL_RESEMBLING_ISSUE_ATTRIBUTE_COPY,Status
ALL,EAICL_MATCHING_CRITERIA_NUMERIC_PRECISION,6

Deploying the issue inheritance mechanism

Enable the issue inheritance mechanism

1. From the ClearanceDB Work Area, create the ALL product:

create_product.pl ALL

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 9-3


© 2024 Siemens
9. Issue inheritance

2. In the ALL product directory set up configuration.csvcldb with the appropriate configuration
attributes. Take note which metadata attributes, such as Part Name, are referenced as matching
attributes in configuration.csvcldb.

3. Modify all configuration.csvcldb files (except the one configuring the ALL product)
so they configure all metadata matching attributes such as Part Name as
EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE.

4. Update all configuration.csvcldb files modified in step 3 in the database. From the respective
product directories, type this:

update_product.pl –uc

5. For all products with clearance issues, if they exist, most likely all products except ALL and
DEFAULT, re-analyze products in the absolute mode and update the database with recalculated
results.

Example:
From SQL*Plus:

exec eaicl_p_reset_gc_attr (eaicl_p_product.product_id


('<product name>'));

From a command line:

analyze_product.pl
update_product.pl –ud

6. Upload configuration.csvcldb of the ALL product to the database. From the ALL product directory,
type this:

update_product.pl –uc

Disable the issue inheritance mechanism

You can disable the existent issue inheritance mechanism by deleting the ALL product.

Disabling the issue inheritance mechanism does not change any issue dispositions persisted in the
database.

From the ClearanceDB Work Area, type this:

delete_product.pl ALL

9-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Modifying the issue inheritance mechanism

Modifying the issue inheritance mechanism

While it is possible to modify the configuration of the issue inheritance mechanism, this may require a
re-analysis of all the products with clearance and may result in substantial change to clearance issue
dispositions.

If matching attributes are modified, it is recommended that you disable the issue inheritance mechanism
and subsequently re-enable it following the steps to enable the issue inheritance mechanism
(skipping the first step to create the ALL product). If matching attributes are not modified, you need
only to upload the modified configuration.csvcldb of the ALL product to the database.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 9-5


© 2024 Siemens
9. Issue inheritance

9-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
10. Log files
Understanding ClearanceDB log files
Running the Clearance Calculator generates a number of log files, most of which are automatically
deleted unless an error occurs. This topic explains the contents of these log files.

The primary ClearanceDB log file is called Log.txt. The Log.txt file is an UTF-16 comma delimited file,
which contains the event log of the analysis. This file is generated each time you run the Clearance
Calculator.

The Log.txt file contains the following fields:

"Timestamp","Event","Name1","Datastore1","Name2","Datastore2"
"Timestamp","Event","CADID1","Datastore1","CADID2","Datastore2"
"Timestamp","Event","Name1","Datastore1","Name2","Datastore2"
"Timestamp","Event","CADID1","Part Number1","CADID2","Part Number2"

where

This field Records this information


Timestamp The date and time of the operation.
Event The name of the event. The following events are recognized:

• Pair added — A part pair was added to the test bed (TmpPairs.txt).

• Loading pairs — The test bed is being loaded for analysis.

• Pair loading complete — All of the test bed is loaded for analysis.

• Result added — A clearance result (incident) was added to the temporary result
set (TmpResults.txt).

• Loading results — The temporary result set is being translated to the


ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb format.

• Results loading complete — All of the temporary result set was translated to
the ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb format.

• Failures loading — The set of failures is being added to the result set when
requested.

• Failure loading complete — All of the failures were processed.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 10-1


© 2024 Siemens
10. Log files

This field Records this information


• Failure added — A failure to arrive at a clearance result due to failure to
calculate within a time limit or at all is recognized.

• All processing is complete — Analysis is complete.

• Pair to be analyzed exactly the second time — The second attempt at


NURBS analysis.

• Pair to be analyzed approximately the second time — The second


attempt at facet based analysis.

• Pair to be analyzed approximately only — The first attempt at facet


based analysis after the NURBS analysis failed.
Name1 Determined by the IdentifyPartOccurrencesWithMetadata setting in the
Clearance.cfgglobal file.
Datastore1 Determined by the IdentifyPartsWithDatastores setting in the
Clearance.cfgglobal file.
Name2 Determined by the IdentifyPartOccurrencesWithMetadata setting in the
Clearance.cfgglobal file.
Datastore2 Determined by the IdentifyPartsWithDatastores setting in the
Clearance.cfgglobal file.

Note:
The Timestamp and Event data is always present in the file. The remaining fields are populated
only if the appropriate settings in the Clearance.cfgglobal file are defined.

The Clearance.cfgglobal contains a number of other parameters which affect the contents of the Log.txt
file. You can adjust the following settings:

This setting Does this


ProgressDirectory Specifies the location of all log files, including the
Log.txt file. By default, these files are placed in a
directory called FTC, which is located in the same
directory as the Clearance Calculator executable.
IdentifyPartsWithDatastores Indicates whether part occurrences are identified
with file names or with part names in the Log.txt
file (1 or 0). The default is 1.
MaxLogFileSize Defines the size of individual log files (Log.txt,
Log_2.txt, etc.) in megabytes. If the log file size
limit is reached, the application automatically creates

10-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Understanding ClearanceDB log files

This setting Does this


multiple log files. Multiple log files follow the naming
convention, Log.txt, Log_2.txt, Log_3.txt,
etc. The minimum log file size is 32 MB. The
maximum log file size is 2048 MB (minus 1 byte
subtracted). The default size is 2048 MB.
RecordPartPairAdditionEvents Controls whether the test bed (part pair) creation
events are recorded in the log file (1 or 0). The
default is 1.
RecordClearanceResultAdditionEvents Controls whether the clearance results creation
events are recorded in the log file (1 or 0). The
default is 1.

In addition to the Log.txt file, the following temporary files are created and deleted when you run the
Clearance Calculator:

This file Has this purpose


TmpLock.txt Indicates that the Clearance Calculator is utilizing a particular directory (where
the file is created, specified by the ProgressDirectory parameter in the
Clearance.cfgglobal file). Only one ClearanceExe application can use a given working
directory at a time. This is a binary file, and it is always 0 bytes in size.
TmpFail.txt Counts failures to arrive at the result of clearance analysis. This is a binary file.
TmpPairs.txt Stores the list of part pairs to be analyzed (the clearance test bed). This is a binary file.
It is 12 * (number of part pairs) bytes in size.
TmpResults.txt Stores the temporary results of clearance calculations (violations only). The records
of the file are keyed off the internal IDs of part occurrences, and are not meaningful
except to the Clearance Calculator application. This is an ASCII comma delimited file.
TmpHeader.txt Monitors the progress of the Clearance Calculator worker process. This is an ASCII
comma delimited file. It consists of a single record of the following seven fields:

• Field 1 — The name of the file relative to the directory the Clearance Calculator
is started from.

• Field 2 — The timestamp of the start of the Clearance Calculator.

• Field 3 — The timestamp of the start of the Clearance Calculator, or the last
re-start, whichever is later.

• Field 4 — The cardinality of the clearance test bed as it is discovered, starts at


0, then grows to some value, and remains unchanged during the actual part pair
clearance calculations. This correlates to the TmpPairs.txt size with the factor of 12.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 10-3


© 2024 Siemens
10. Log files

This file Has this purpose


• Field 5 — The currently analyzed part pair, starts with 0, then grows to the value
of Field 4, and is incremented by 1 when all of the calculations complete.

• Field 6 — The number of failed attempts to arrive at the result of the current
part pair.

• Field 7 — The initialization state: 1 after the test bed is completely generated.

Example:
"FTC/TmpHeader.txt", "2006/05/26 15:09:34", "2006/05/31
09:24:28", "7126488", "268848", "0", "1"

Understanding ClearanceDB advanced log files


EAI_CL_ADVANCED_TRACE_FILE is a log file for clearance batch analysis that reports all major events.

Warning:
Enabling this log file may significantly affect system performance, especially if running in a multi-
process or multi-thread mode.

The log file is enabled by setting the environment variable EAI_CL_ADVANCED_TRACE_FILE.

Example:
EAI_CL_ADVANCED_TRACE_FILE=mylog.log

Unless a full path is specified for the log file, the file is created in the directory from which
analyze_product.pl or analyze_managed_product.pl is executed.

Because a large amount of data can be written to the log file, the environment variable,
EAI_CL_ADVANCED_TRACE_FLAGS, is used to control the data that is saved, allowing you to include
additional sections. You can add these sections:

• LOADING — 3D data loading events.

• EXCLUSIONS — Exclusions from the clearance analysis due to ClearanceDB rulebase and variant
conditions.

• ANALYSIS — Committed memory and available physical memory reported as calculations progress
(for multi-threaded analysis only).

10-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Understanding ClearanceDB advanced log files

• URESULTS — Undefined results, including pair analysis timeouts.

To include these sections, specify them with the environment variable as follows:

Example:
To include one section: EAI_CL_ADVANCED_TRACE_FLAGS=LOADING
To include multiple sections, separate them with a +:
EAI_CL_ADVANCED_TRACE_FLAGS=LOADING+EXCLUSIONS+ANALYSIS+URESULTS

The EAI_CL_ADVANCED_TRACE_FILE log file contains the following columns:

Timestamp

Process Number

Thread Number

Authoring module

Event

Event Outcome

Number (relevant to the owning event row)

Text Field 1 (relevant to the owning event row)

Text Field 2 ( relevant to the owning event row)

(Optional) Event Duration (In seconds, usually associated with the End events in respect to Begin
events.)

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 10-5


© 2024 Siemens
10. Log files

10-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
11. Rules
What are clearance rules?
What are clearance rules?

Prior to the introduction of the clearance rules editor, Mockup users could only perform clearance
analyses using a single, global requirement (usually 0). With clearance rules and conditions, users have
complete control over what parts are being analyzed, and what the requirements are between any pair
of parts, or between any groups of parts. This functionality was previously only available to ClearanceDB
users running Clearance in batch mode using Clearance.exe. Using the rules editor in Mockup, users are
now able to visualize the scope of any rule or combination of rules, or execute any rule or combination
of rules to see the results of that analysis.

To learn more about using rules in Mockup, see the topics in Working with clearance rules in the
Lifecycle Visualization end user help.

Clearance conditions

Clearance conditions define the scope of data to which rules apply. You can use any metadata associated
with your model to define the conditions for any rule.

Rules can have one or many conditions. Generally, as more conditions are applied to a rule, the scope of
the rule becomes smaller, as will the results. Rules can also have no conditions at all, in which case the
scope of the rule is the entire model.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 11-1


© 2024 Siemens
11. Rules

Why are rules and conditions useful?

Clearance rules and conditions enable you to limit the analysis to only those areas that are desired,
which in turn helps to optimize the performance of the analysis. Using the rules editor, you can load
your existing rules and conditions data into the viewer for visualization and analysis, or you can author
rules and conditions from scratch inside the viewer. When done, you can save your rules and conditions
either to a file on the local file system as a .csvcldb file, or to the Clearance database (ClearanceDB).

Rules and conditions can give you additional control over the clearance analysis in situations such as the
following:

• Limit the analysis to certain parts or assemblies only.

• Exclude parts from the analysis because they will always show up as false positives. For example, a
rivet or a flexible rubber seal.

• Prevent parts within a particular subassembly from being analyzed because the assembly is provided
by a supplier.

• Define a larger requirement between two groups of parts, such as between fuel lines and engine parts
that might get very hot.

What if more than one rule applies to the same part pair?

You can create and apply multiple rules to conduct analyses according to arbitrarily complex design
criteria. For part pairs that fall under the scope of multiple rules, Clearance conducts analyses according
to the following:

• The largest clearance requirement is always used.

• The largest requirement along the path from the root node to the part is always used.

• If any of the rules specify to exclude either of the parts from analysis, the pair is not analyzed.

• Rules that exclude parts always take precedence over rules that specify to include particular part sets.

• If no rule applies to the part pair, it is not analyzed.

Using rules in clearance analysis


Use the following rule and condition examples to better understand the full scope of their potential in
clearance analysis. Rules can be either inclusion (additive) or exclusion (subtractive).

11-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Using rules in clearance analysis

Design Pattern Definition


General non- Defines a single, global requirement that applies to all parts in the model. There
interference are no conditions, so the scope of the rule is not limited to any set of parts.
Single inclusion Defines a single set of parts using a single condition, and a minimum distance
between those parts and any other parts in the model.
Single condition Defines a single set of parts using a single condition, then excludes those parts
(exclusion) from the analysis.
Single condition Defines a single set of parts by using a single condition which applies to the
(assembly) ancestors of a part ( in other words, a “branch” of the product structure) and a
minimum distance between those parts and any other parts in the model.
Multiple conditions Defines a single set of parts using multiple conditions, and a minimum distance
per rule between those parts and any other parts in the model.
Left/right part sets Defines 2 sets of parts (left/right), and a minimum distance between parts in the
left set and parts in the right set.
Self inclusion Defines a single set of parts (a condition), and a rule with left/right part sets
that both share that same condition. This results in a rule that checks a part set
against itself.
Self exclusion (end Defines a single set of parts (a condition), and a rule with left/right part sets that
item) both share that same condition. This excludes any issues between parts within
that set.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 11-3


© 2024 Siemens
11. Rules

Example: General non-interference rule

Pattern General non-interference


Description Defines a single, global requirement
that applies to all parts in the
model.
There are no conditions, so the
scope of the rule is not limited to
any set of parts
This is equivalent to a “matrix
clearance” in Mockup with a
requirement of zero.
Example No parts can be closer than 0 mm
to any other parts.
Requirement 0 mm
Conditions None

11-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Using rules in clearance analysis

Example: Single inclusion rule

Pattern Single inclusion


Description Defines a single set of parts using
a single condition, and a minimum
distance between those parts and
any other parts in the model
Example Cubes cannot be closer than 10 mm
to any other parts in the model
(including other cubes).
Requirement 10 mm
Conditions Name = Cube

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 11-5


© 2024 Siemens
11. Rules

Example: Single condition (exclusion) rule

Pattern Single condition (exclusion)


Description Defines a single set of parts using
a single condition, then excludes
those parts from the analysis.
Exclusion rules always require at
least one inclusion rule (usually
general non-interference) to define
the scope of the analysis to be
excluded from.
Example Exclude all cubes from the analysis.
Requirement None (exclusion)
Conditions Name = Cube

11-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Using rules in clearance analysis

Example: Single condition (assembly) rule

Pattern Single condition (assembly)


Description Defines a single set of parts by
identifying an assembly node(s)
in the product structure and a
minimum distance between the
children of those assemblies and
any other parts in the model.
Example Children of Level1a cannot be closer
than 10 mm to any other parts in
the model (including other children
of Level1a).
Requirement 10 mm
Conditions Name = Level1a
Search Assemblies

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 11-7


© 2024 Siemens
11. Rules

Example: Multiple conditions per rule

Pattern Multiple conditions


Description Defines a single set of parts
using multiple conditions, and a
minimum distance between those
parts and any other parts in the
model.
Multiple conditions on the same
rule are conjoined by "And"
(condition x AND condition y).
Example Red spheres owned by Bob cannot
be closer than 10 mm to any other
parts in the model (including other
red spheres owned by Bob).
Requirement 10 mm
Conditions Color = red
Name = Sphere
Owner = Bob

11-8 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Using rules in clearance analysis

Example: Left/right part sets rule

Pattern Left/right part sets


Description Defines 2 sets of parts (left and
right), and a minimum distance
between parts in the left set and
parts in the right set.
Example Green cubes cannot be closer than
10 mm to red spheres.
Requirement 10 mm
Conditions Left: Color = green, Name = Cube
Right: Color = red, Name = Sphere

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 11-9


© 2024 Siemens
11. Rules

Example: Self inclusion rule

Pattern Self inclusion


Description Defines a single set of parts by
using a rule with left/right part sets
that both share the same condition.
This results in a rule that checks a
part set against itself.
This is equivalent to a matrix
clearance where only the parts
within the group of interest are in
scope.
Example Green cubes cannot be closer than
10 mm to other green cubes.
Requirement 10 mm
Conditions Left: Color = green, Name = Cube
Right: Color = green, Name = Cube

11-10 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
ClearanceDB rules and conditions details

Example: Self exclusion rule

Pattern Self exclusion (end item)


Description Defines a single set of parts by
using a rule with left/right part sets
that both share the same condition.
This results in a rule that checks
a part set against itself, and then
excludes any issues between parts
within that set.
Example Exclude all issues between green
cubes.
Requirement None (exclusion)
Conditions Left: Color = green, Name = cube
Right: Color = green, Name = cube

ClearanceDB rules and conditions details


Rules definition

ClearanceDB rules consist of the following:

• Rule Number — A unique number used to associate the rule with conditions.

• Product Name — The name of the model to which you want the rule to apply. This is the name of the
top-level node in the model assembly.

• Rule Description — Your description of the rule.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 11-11


© 2024 Siemens
11. Rules

• Requirement — The clearance requirement value. For actual clearance distance requirements, this
must be a numerical value. The unit of measurement is the model units value. For exclusion rules, use
a value of NONE.

Example:
Rule Number,Product Name,Rule Description,Requirement
100,fishing_reel,General Non-Interference,0

Conditions definition

ClearanceDB conditions consist of the following components:

• Rule Number — The numerical identifier of the rule that you want to associate with the condition.

• Condition Description — Your description of the condition.

• Condition Domain — The part sets to which you want the condition to apply. Use any of the following
values:

• Single Node — Use this value when you want to specify a single set of parts only. The second set of
parts is considered the entire model.

• Left Node — Use this value to specify the left set of parts.

• Right Node — Use this value to specify the right set of parts.

• Search Type — Where to search within the product assembly. Use any of the following values:

• Node Only — Use this value to look for a condition match on part nodes only (individual parts
within an assembly or subassembly, not the root nodes).

• Node Parents — Use this value to look for a condition match on part nodes and also the parents of
part nodes (individual parts within an assembly or subassembly, as well as root nodes).

• Parents Only — Use this value to look for a condition match on root nodes only (the root of an
assembly or subassembly, not the child parts).

11-12 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
ClearanceDB rules and conditions details

The search type specifies where to search within the product assembly.

• Match Type — The applicability of the condition in the event of a match or a mismatch. Use either of
the following values:

• Y — Use this value if you want the condition to apply for matches.

• N — Use this value if you want the condition to apply for mismatches.

• Attribute Name — Any metadata associated with the parts or assemblies of the product. Any value
that you specify must be embedded in your model and usually originates from your CAD package. The
specified value functions as a category, and is examined together with the Attribute Pattern, which
functions as the category value.

Note:
You can use the pseudo-attribute name eaiclNAME to refer to the node name itself.

• Attribute Pattern — A pattern to be matched with the wild card character %. This value is searched
for in relation to the Attribute Name. For example, if you enter DesignationEnglish as the Attribute
Name, and %FLOOR% as the Attribute Pattern, your results will include any parts with a metadata
category named DesignationEnglish and a string value that contains the word FLOOR.

Example:
Rule Number,Condition Description,Condition Domain,Search Type,
Match Type,Attribute Name,Attribute Pattern
100,Match Part Name,Left Node,Node parents,Y,eaiclNAME,spool_assembly%

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 11-13


© 2024 Siemens
11. Rules

Upload rules and conditions to the database


In order to apply rules and conditions to your products, you must upload and merge the rules.csvcldb
and conditions.csvcldb files with your database.

1. Navigate to the appropriate product directory in your ClearanceDB Work Area.

2. Do either of the following:

To upload rules and conditions Do this


(Windows) From the shortcut menu Right-click the rules.csvcldb file and choose Upload to
ClearanceDB.
From the command prompt Type
update_product.pl -ur

11-14 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
12. Images
What are clearance images?
You can create and export 2D images during a clearance analysis using either Teamcenter lifecycle
visualization mockup or Clearance.exe. Mockup will generally create higher quality images, but that
process can also take longer than creating the images through Clearance.exe. Also, using mockup
you can create as many different images as desired for each clearance result, which you cannot do
when using Clearance.exe. (Clearance.exe generates only one image per result.) Typically, ClearanceDB
administrators develop scripts that create and upload images in batch as part of an automated process,
but end-users can also create them using mockup.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 12-1


© 2024 Siemens
12. Images

Note:
• Creating clearance images can be a very time-consuming process. You should be aware that
additional computing resources may be necessary to create images within the desired time
frame.

• For businesses that run their clearance analyses on Linux using Clearance.exe, be aware that
the higher-quality images created in Teamcenter lifecycle visualization mockup is available on
Windows only.

Create images in batch using Mockup


You can create 2D images of clearance analysis results in Mockup either interactively or in batch. To
create images in batch, set up a ClearanceDB Work Area and then run the create_images.pl script on
the products of interest. You can then upload the images to the clearance database, if desired. You can
then manually add the images to your products.

Before you can run the create_images.pl script, you must create a product directory with a
modified Clearance.cfgproduct (configuration file) and turn on General Clearance Results in the
Clearance.cfgglobal file. Once complete, you will have an image folder that looks similar to the image
below. You can then run the update_product.pl script to upload the images to the Clearance database.

12-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Create images in batch using Mockup

The supplied Siemens scripts operate on a single product only. You must create (or edit) your own
script to iterate through your list of products and process each one. The supplied scripts include
list_all_products.pl, analyze_product.pl, and analyze_managed_product.pl, and by default are located in
C:\Program Files\Siemens\Teamcenterx.x\Visualization\Products\Mockup\ClearanceDB.

This option Does this


<product> Identifies the name of the product for which the images will be created. This value is not
required if executing within a product library.
-h Displays the help message.

1. (Optional) Activate multi-image (per clearance result) export in Mockup.

a. Launch Mockup and load any model.

b. Choose Analysis tab→Clearance group→Enable Clearance Analysis .

c. In the Clearance group, choose Clearance Preferences →Results Preferences.

d. In the Clearance Results Preferences dialog box on the General page, click Generate
images during clearance analysis and Create multiple images per result.

e. Click Define Images and define your image settings:

To Do this
Add a camera Click Add.
definition.
A new camera definition row is added to the table. Edit the definition to
customize the camera settings.
Edit a camera A. Select the desired camera row from the table.
definition.
B. Click Edit.

C. In the Edit Image Settings dialog box, use the dropdown lists to
define the camera Zoom %, Camera angle, and Section values for
this camera definition.

D. (Optional) Click the right or left arrows to navigate to the next


camera definition or to the previous camera definition.

E. Click OK.
Delete a camera A. Select the desired camera row from the table.
definition.
B. Click Delete.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 12-3


© 2024 Siemens
12. Images

f. In the Define Clearance Images dialog box, click OK.

g. Close Mockup.

2. At a command prompt, create a ClearanceDB Work Area.

3. Create the desired product folder in your work area, if you haven't already done so.

a. Change to the ClearanceDB_Work_Area directory.

b. Create a product, or use an existing product.

4. Run the create_images.pl script. If you run the script from the work area folder, you must include
the product name.

The images are placed in the Images folder in the product directory and you will see an output
similar to the image below.

5. Run the update_product.pl script to upload the images to the Clearance database.

To create images for all products, create or edit your script that processes the products in your
ClearanceDB_Work_Area.

For each product in your product list, add the following line:

create_images(); #create the images

Example:
#get the list of products to process (customer script)
product_list=get_product_list();

for (each product in product_list)


analyze_product(); #analyze the product

for (each product in product_list)


create_images(); #create the images

12-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Create images in batch using Mockup

Tip:
Siemens Digital Industries Software recommends that you use separate for loops for each product,
as shown in the example, so that all products are calculated and uploaded before images are
created and uploaded. Using a single for loop processes and uploads images for the current
product before the next product calculation begins, which could significantly slow down your
product calculations.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 12-5


© 2024 Siemens
12. Images

12-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
13. Server-side filters
Server-side filters
Server-side filtering extends the use of the viewer clearance filters to the ClearanceDB database server.
When applied to ClearanceDB results already loaded in the viewer, a filter specifies which results to
display. When applied to ClearanceDB database queries, a filter controls which results to load into
the client. Server-side filters provide smaller and faster clearance result loading times, especially when
working with large sets of data.

Note:
Server-side filters do not affect the display of clearance results already displayed in the Clearance
Results window. They affect the set of clearance results that are loaded from the database to the
viewer. If you want to refine clearance results already loaded from the database, you can create
and apply an additional filter from within the viewer.

While the performance of server-side filters varies according to the filter definition, these are some
general guidelines:

• The more selective the filter, the smaller the clearance results set and the faster the response from the
database.

• Filters with the "=" operator result in faster queries than those with the "!=" operator.

• Definitions without wild cards ("*") are more efficient than those containing them.

Filter modes
There are two modes of server-side filtering available, Direct and Symmetric. The default filter mode is
Direct.

In Direct mode, the filter is interpreted by the database as is. In particular, the references to Part
Number1 and Part Number2 are applied only to parts identified in the database as Part Number1 and to
Part Number2. In Symmetric mode, the references to Part Number1 and Part Number2 are augmented
symmetrically with corresponding references to Part Number2 and Part Number1.

Example:
For example, the filter Part Number1 = Name1 is augmented with the Part Number2 =
Name1 clause in the Symmetric mode. In addition, Part Number1 = Name1 and Part
Number2 = Name2 is augmented by Part Number1 = Name2 and Part Number2 =
Name1, and so on.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 13-1


© 2024 Siemens
13. Server-side filters

Referencing part attributes


Server-side filtering supports part attributes in both the Direct and Symmetric modes. Part attributes to
be filtered on can be either direct or inferred.

Direct attributes are directly attached to parts. In the viewer, you can view these by right-clicking a
part, and selecting Properties. Inferred attributes are not necessarily attached to parts. They can be
associated with any assembly the part belongs to. Inferred attributes can be discovered using any of the
following search methods:

• Part only

• Part parent only

• Part and parents (part first)

• Part and parents (root first)

• Parents only (part parent first)

• Parents only (root first)

For server-side filters to reference inferred attributes, you must do the following:

• Include attribute configuration specifications in the Clearance.cfgglobal or Clearance.cfgproduct file.

• Perform the clearance batch analysis, and upload the results to the ClearanceDB database.

• Define the server-side filter in the viewer, choosing the appropriate columns from the Filter Values
dialog box.

Create server-side filters


To create server-side filters, do the following:

1. In the viewer, define a Clearance filter with your search criteria. Save the filter to the registry.

Note:
Refer to Search and filter clearance results for detailed information on creating clearance
filters and saving them to the registry.

2. Create or modify a DBC file in the following way:

13-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Create server-side filters

To Add this line


Enable a filter FILTER_NAME=[FILTERNAME]
where
FILTERNAMEis the name of the filter saved to the registry.
Specify to use the filter designated by FILTER_NAME=eaiclINITIAL
the user to be loaded on startup
Specify that no filter should be FILTER_NAME=eaiclNONE
applied
Specify the filter mode FILTER_MODE=[FILTERMODE]
where
FILTERMODEis one of these values:

• DIRECT

• SYMMETRIC

Example:
For example, a DBC file that enables a server-side filter might look like this:

DATASOURCE=proxymachine:7206
CONNECT_DATA=SECONDDB
FILTER_NAME=myCDBFilter
FILTER_MODE=DIRECT

3. Within the viewer, load the DBC file.

The registry is searched for the specified filter. If found, the filter definition is submitted to the
Clearance database. If results match the filter criteria, they are loaded into the viewer. If the filter is
not found in the registry, you can load the results without filtering or cancel loading the results.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 13-3


© 2024 Siemens
13. Server-side filters

13-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
14. Zones
Defining clearance zones
ClearanceDB enables you to create interference/clearance zones. Clearance zones allow you to perform
analysis based upon the location of parts and assemblies within the model, rather than by attribute
information.

Understanding clearance zones


A zone is defined by a bounding box that consists of two 3D points, X1, Y1, Z1, and X2, Y2, Z2. An
interference/clearance issue belongs to a zone under the following conditions:

• In the case of penetration, if the point that corresponds to the largest penetration is within the zone
bounding box.

• In the case of contact, if the point that represents the average of all the points of contact is within the
zone bounding box.

• In the case of distance, if the minimum distance midpoint between the two closest points is within
the zone bounding box.

In the case of overlapping zones, the zone sequence determines the search order. The first zone found
that contains an issue is assigned the issue.

If no named zone can be assigned to a clearance issue because of the absence of a definition or because
of geometric concerns, the value of "Unknown" is assigned to the clearance issue.

Zones definition

ClearanceDB zones consist of the following content:

• Product name — The name of the model to which you want the rule to apply. This is the name of the
top-level node in an assembly.

• Configuration name — A name that you provide that describes the product configuration.

• Seq — The position in the zone sequence. The zone sequence determines the search order.

• Zone name — A name that you provide for the zone.

• X1 — The X axis coordinate that defines the beginning of the zone.

• Y1 — The Y axis coordinate that defines the beginning of the zone.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 14-1


© 2024 Siemens
14. Zones

• Z1 — The Z axis coordinate that defines the beginning of the zone.

• X2 — The X axis coordinate that defines the end of the zone.

• Y2 — The Y axis coordinate that defines the end of the zone.

• Z2 — The Z axis coordinate that defines the end of the zone.

Uploading zones to the database


In order to apply zones to your products, you must upload and merge the zones.csvcldb file with your
database.

1. Navigate to the appropriate product directory in your ClearanceDB Work Area.

2. Do any of the following:

To upload product Do this


attributes
From the command Type
prompt
update_product.pl [<product>] [-uz] [-df]

Example:
update_product.pl fishing_reel -uz

(Windows) From the In the product directory, right-click the zones.csvcldb file and choose
shortcut menu Upload to ClearanceDB.

Example zones file


An example of a zones file is shown below.

A-728AIRCRAFT,DEFAULT,1,CTR_SECTION_UNPRESSURIZED,9000,-1630,1500,18500,1
630,3400
A-728AIRCRAFT,DEFAULT,2,AFT_FUSELAGE_UNPRESSURIZED,21819,-1500,2750,28900
,1500,5700
A-728AIRCRAFT,DEFAULT,3,PYLON_LHS,10000,-3500,2000,16900,-4500,3300
A-728AIRCRAFT,DEFAULT,4,PYLON_RHS,10000,3500,2000,16900,4500,3300
A-728AIRCRAFT,DEFAULT,5,WING_LHS,11000,0,2000,18500,13500,4500
A-728AIRCRAFT,DEFAULT,6,ATA531_FWD_COCKPIT,2480,-1735,2265,5642.8,1735,57
35
A-728AIRCRAFT,DEFAULT,7,ATA532_FWD_FUSELAGE,5642.8,-1735,2265,10570.4,173
5,5735

14-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Example zones file

A-728AIRCRAFT,DEFAULT,8,ATA533_CENTRE_FUSELAGE,10570.4,-1735,2265,16299,1
735,5735
A-728AIRCRAFT,DEFAULT,9,ATA534_REAR_FUSELAGE,16299,-1735,2265,22056.4,173
5,5735
A-728AIRCRAFT,DEFAULT,10,ATA535_REAR_FUSELAGE,22056.4,-1735,2265,24514,17
35,5735
A-728AIRCRAFT,DEFAULT,11,UNPOS_PARTS,500,500,500,-500,-500,-500

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 14-3


© 2024 Siemens
14. Zones

14-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter
Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter
You can perform ClearanceDB analysis on product data stored in Teamcenter. Analysis of managed
product data is performed via the analyze_managed_product.pl script, which launches the processes
that evaluate the data and then automatically uploads the results to the ClearanceDB database.

ClearanceDB offers a number of options for working with Teamcenter, including:

• Analyze the data associated with BOM lines on a product-by-product basis.

• Perform a single clearance variant analysis that excludes all non-buildable part pairs from a 150%
BOM line.

• Work with Design Context to identify a series of target parts and then quickly find other relevant data
within a given proximity to those parts.

• Analyze the data associated with 4GD worksets.

You can evaluate ClearanceDB results in standalone Mockup, the Teamcenter Lifecycle Viewer, Structure
Manager, and Design Context. However, ClearanceDB results based on 4GD worksets can be evaluated
only in standalone Mockup.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-1


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

Product and system requirements


The ClearanceDB integration with Teamcenter has the following requirements:

• A properly configured and functioning ClearanceDB software environment, including the


ClearanceDB Server, Proxy, and Client tiers.

• A Teamcenter server.

For information about the platforms on which you can run Teamcenter lifecycle visualization,
download the appropriate platform matrix spreadsheet from Support Center.

• An FMS file client cache (FCC).

• A Teamcenter user account with system administrator privileges.

• Product data in the JT or PLM XML format within an item revision on the Teamcenter server.

• Absolute occurrence IDs for all BOM lines to be analyzed.

Enable batch clearance calculation for ClearanceDB


You must enable ClearanceDB functionality to utilize clearance results from your database.

1. Choose Analysis tab→Clearance group→Enable Clearance Analysis .

2. In the Clearance group, choose Clearance Preferences →Requirement Components.

3. In the Requirement Components dialog box, select one or more of these options:

Select this option To obtain results in this way


Universal Clearance From analysis that you conduct locally in Mockup.
Requirement
Requirement Rules from According to requirement rules and conditions that you access
ClearanceDB Server in your organization's ClearanceDB Oracle database.

4. In the Clearance group, choose Clearance Preferences →Result Components.

5. In the Result Components dialog box, select one or more of these options:

15-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Steps to analyze managed products

Note:
You must choose General Clearance Results to work with results in the Results list.

Select this option To work with results in this way


General Clearance Results Visually display the results within Mockup.
ClearanceDB Results Upload the results to your organization's Oracle database.

6. Click OK.

Steps to analyze managed products


The following process describes the tasks needed to analyze a Teamcenter item revision in ClearanceDB:

1. Ensure that your environment meets the requirements for performing ClearanceDB analysis on
data from Teamcenter.

2. Create a ClearanceDB product, following the procedures located in the Setting up products for
analysis section of this guide. This includes the following:

• The product configuration, which is required.

Note:
In a managed environment, ClearanceDB is configured by Teamcenter revision rules, so
ClearanceDB configuration names are Teamcenter revision rule names.

• Rules, at least one of which is required.

• Conditions, which are optional.

• Zones, which are optional.

Note:
The name of the product must be the same as the top-level node in the assembly. Send the
item revision containing the product data to Structure Manager to obtain the name of the top
level assembly node, which is displayed in the BOM Line column.
If you are working within a Teamcenter multifield key environment, see Configuring
ClearanceDB for multifield key data.

3. Update the global configuration options for working with Teamcenter data.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-3


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

4. Specify for ClearanceDB to use absolute occurrence IDs.

5. Specify the item and revision IDs for the top level assembly of your product.

6. Specify your web server protocol in the global .vvi file.

7. If you want to perform analysis using Teamcenter variant conditions, enable variant analysis for
Clearance.

8. If you want to cache the product data on your local machine to improve the performance of the
analysis, adjust the load_fcccache options.

9. Use the analyze_managed_product.pl script to perform analysis on the managed product and
upload the results to the database.

Performing adhoc ClearanceDB analysis


Although ClearanceDB analysis is most frequently performed as part of a regularly scheduled batch
process from the command prompt, you can also manually analyze ClearanceDB products in real-time
within the Viewer, according to the rules and conditions associated with the product in the database.

Adhoc ClearanceDB analysis is subject to all of the considerations and restrictions of ClearanceDB
analysis, including the following:

• To analyze data from Teamcenter, you must configure ClearanceDB to work with Teamcenter-
managed data. For information on configuring ClearanceDB to work with Teamcenter, refer to the
Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter section of ClearanceDB ─ Administration.

• To access ClearanceDB product information, including rules and conditions, the clearance
requirements must be set to Requirement Rules from ClearanceDB Server.

• To upload the results of adhoc ClearanceDB analysis to the ClearanceDB database, the clearance
results settings must be set to ClearanceDB Results.

Define ClearanceDB roles


To protect Teamcenter ClearanceDB data viewed in Active Workspace, assign users to one of the
ClearanceDB roles within the ClearanceDB group. For more information, see Define ClearanceDB roles in
Active Workspace.

Configuring ClearanceDB to work with Teamcenter

Teamcenter global configuration options

You must update the Clearance.cfgglobal file to match your Teamcenter environment.

15-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Teamcenter global configuration options

1. Using a text editor, open the Clearance.cfgglobal file.

2. Change any of the following settings in the Section 1: Teamcenter Configuration section of the file
to configure ClearanceDB to work with Teamcenter:
TC_ROOT
Specifies the Teamcenter root directory.
TC_DATA
Specifies the Teamcenter TC_DATA directory.
ObjectType or ItemRevisionType (Optional)
Specifies to perform analysis of 4GD worksets. If ObjectType=Workset, then
item, rev, and rev_rule arguments are interpreted as those of a workset. If
ObjectType=ClearanceCalculationSubset, then ModelId, ClearanceCalculationName, and
PartitionSchemes arguments are interpreted as those of a clearance calculation subset. The
plmxml_export utility will be invoked to extract the product structure from Teamcenter, rather
than the BOMwriter utility.

ModelId, ClearanceCalculationName, and PartitionSchemes are Teamcenter variables used


only for the script analyze_managed_product.pl, which runs clearance analysis on the
managed product (clearance calculation subset) in Teamcenter.

Example:
ModelId=JCB-Fastrac_id ClearanceCalculationName=CC_JCB-Fastrac
PartitionSchemes=
"Ptn0SchemePhysicalForJCB-Fastrac;Ptn0SchemeFunctionalForJCB-Fastrac"
If no Partition schemes are specified, no 4GD partition data will be exported.

TeamcenterUserId
Specifies a Teamcenter user name with Teamcenter system administration privileges. If no user
name is provided, ClearanceDB uses the operating system user name.

Note:
This is the same option as the bomwriter -u= command line argument.

TeamcenterUserPassword
This setting is deprecated. The Teamcenter user password is now stored in a separate file, and
the path to the file is specified with the TeamcenterUserPasswordFile setting. Now if the
password is specified with TeamcenterUserPassword, it is written to an unencrypted file in the
user’s home directory with a randomly generated name beginning with CLDB.
TeamcenterUserPasswordFile
Specifies the path to a file containing the Teamcenter user password.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-5


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

Note:
This is the same option as the bomwriter -pf= command line argument.

TeamcenterUserGroupId
Specifies the Teamcenter group ID. If no group ID is provided, ClearanceDB uses the default
group of the specified Teamcenter user.

Note:
This is the same option as the bomwriter -g= command line argument.

RevisionRule
Specifies the revision rule for the product's top level product structure node, or the revision rule
of a workset when ItemRevisionType=Workset.

Note:
This is the same option as the bomwriter -revision_rule= command line argument, or
the plmxml_export -rev_rule when ItemRevisionType=Workset.

SavedVariantRule
Specifies the saved variant configuration to pass to the BOMwriter. The setting is not active
when ItemRevisionType=Workset.
LexicographicalVariantAnalysis
Defines the mode of the evaluation of variant condition relational expressions. Choose one of
the following:

No — If indeterminable variant conditions exist, the affected variant inferences are asked from
the server. This is the default.

Yes — If indeterminable variant conditions exist, evaluate them lexicographically.

Note:
Variant conditions that cannot be evaluated based on textual representations are
indeterminable.

VariantAnalysisClientTraceFile
Specifies the name for the log file of the variant analysis. By default, this is not set, and a log file
is not generated.

15-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Teamcenter global configuration options

Example:
VariantAnalysisClientTraceFile=cldb_variant_analysis.log

VariantAnalysisClientTraceFlags
Specified the content of the log file of the variant analysis. The trace flags are additive,
concatenated with the plus (+) character.

Example:
VariantAnalysisClientTraceFlags=CONFIGURATION+STATISTICS

Add any of the following flags:

CONFIGURATION Lists the variant analysis configuration attributes.


STATISTICS Provides the basic variant analysis statistics.
VARIANTCONDITIONS Provides details of textual variant conditions.
DETERMINABILITY Lists the determinability of variant conditions.
SATISFIABILITY Lists the satisfiability of variant conditions.
EXCLUDEDVCPAIRS Lists excluded variant condition pairs.
EXCUDEDUIDPAIRS Lists excluded clearance element pairs as ABSOCCs.
EXCLUDEDNGIDPAIRS Lists excluded clearance element pairs as NGIDs.
IMPACT Lists the impact of variant conditions on the product structure.

Caution:
Enabling the EXCUDEDUIDPAIRS and EXCLUDEDNGIDPAIRS trace flags may result in
extremely large log files.

VariantLogicalExpression
Defines the variant condition UserValue title and BOM line property pair in the .plmxml file. This
has the form of:

“Variant Condition”:bl_variant_condition

“Variant Formula”:bl_formula

Example:
VariantLogicalExpression="VC:bl_variant_condition"

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-7


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

Note:
This must match the content of the BomWriterUserAttributes setting.

RunLevel
Specifies the actions of the analyze_managed_product.pl script. Use a value from 1 to 6.

1 — In the product directory, a. vvi file is created, which is used by the BOMwriter to
generate a .plmxml file referencing the managed data.
2 — Using the .vvi and .plmxml files in the product directory, the Clearance Calculator
performs analysis upon the managed product data and generates a results file.
3 — The results file is uploaded to the ClearanceDB database.
4 — Both the RunLevel 1 and 2 actions are performed.
5 — Both the RunLevel 2 and 3 actions are performed.
6 — All of the RunLevel actions are performed, 1, 2, and 3.
BomWriterUserAttributes
Specifies the variant conditions for the BOMwriter to include in the generated .plmxml file.
Type these according to the following syntax:

target:Instance,key:myAttribute,literal:\"My Attribute Value\"

Note:
This is the same option as the bomwriter -ua= command line argument.

Example:
Use this option to include variant model related BOM line properties in the
generated .plmxml file. For example:
BomWriterUserAttributes=target:Instance,key: VC,prop: bl_variant_condition

TeamcenterWebServerPath
Specifies the Teamcenter web server path, including the protocol, host name, and port
number. Type this according to the following syntax:

TeamcenterWebServerPath=http://machine_name:port

Example:
TeamcenterWebServerPath=http://tcserver:80/tc8_2008/

JtDataStagingProcess

15-8 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Teamcenter global configuration options

Specifies to use the Teamcenter load_fcccache utility to download the model data from the
Teamcenter server to the local system for clearance analysis. Enabling this option pre-populates
the FMS client cache (FCC), which leads to faster and more reliable analysis.

Valid values are 0 (off) or 1 (on). The default value is 0.


JtDataStagingProcessErrorLimit
Specifies when to abort the analyze_managed_product.pl script, based on the following
custom error codes:

FILECOPY_FAILED
INVALID_DAKID_FORMAT
FCC_OPENFILE_FAILED
FCC_DOWNLOAD_FAILED
GET_READ_TICKET_FAILED
DATASET_READ_FAILED
PLMXML_MISSING_JT
CHMOD_FAILED
COPYOUT_CLEANUP_FAILED

You can specify a numerical value for each error code. By default, the error codes are given
values that correspond to the severity of the problem, with the lowest value representing the
most severe failure. If a value is not specified for the JtDataStagingProcessErrorLimit setting,
the script stops whenever an error occurs during the staging process.

The default value is 30.

Note:
The default values are recommended for the JtDataStagingProcessErrorLimit setting
and the related error codes. Essentially, with these defaults the clearance analysis will
abort when any of these errors occur, and you can use the reported error message to
troubleshoot the problem.

FILECOPY_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a copy operation to the output directory has failed.

The default value is 20.


INVALID_DAKID_FORMAT
Specifies the error code that indicates an invalid DAKID was found.

The default value is 21.


FCC_OPENFILE_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates the FCC failed to open the file using the ticket.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-9


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

The default value is 22.


FCC_DOWNLOAD_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a failure most likely due to a missing file in the volume.

The default value is 23.


GET_READ_TICKET_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a read ticket failed.

The default value is 24.


DATASET_READ_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates no read access on the dataset.

The default value is 25.


PLMXML_MISSING_JT
Specifies the error code that indicates a missing JT file reference in the .plmxml file.

The default value is 26.


CHMOD_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a failure to set the access mode during copy out.

The default value is 27.


COPYOUT_CLEANUP_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a failure to remove a file during lifetime cleanup.

The default value is 28.


CopyOutLocation
Specifies the location for the dataset files downloaded from Teamcenter server.

The default location is the product directory in the ClearanceDB Work Area.

Note:
Do not use special characters in folder names.

BucketCount
Specifies how many directories to use for the cached files. Spreading the files over multiple
directories can lead to better performance.

The default value is 30.

15-10 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Teamcenter global configuration options

UseAbsoluteLocation
Specifies to use an absolute value for the location attribute in the .plmxml file generated by the
BOMwriter. It is usually better to have a relative reference, although there are instances where
an absolute reference is required, such as when the .plmxml file is moved to a different location
from the referenced files.

The default value is No.

BucketPrefix
Specifies a prefix to add to the names of directories created to hold the cached files.

The default value is RW.


FilenamePrefix
Specifies a prefix to add to the names of the cached files.

The default value is fmsr_.


CopyOutLifetime
Specifies the lifetime of the files cached in the StagingProcessDownloads directory. The
directory is scanned for files older than the specified value, which are removed. The lifetime
value is specified in seconds, where one day is equal to 86400 seconds and two weeks is equal
to 1209600 seconds.

The default value is 1209600 (two weeks).

Note:
This option requires the FilenamePrefix option to be set since it uses the prefix as
validation of ownership to prevent the accidental removal of files.

LifetimeCheck
Specifies to scan the StagingProcessDownloads directory for files older than the
CopyOutLifetime value.

Valid values are 0 (off) or 1 (on). The default value is 0.


LifetimeCheckInterval
Specifies how often to scan the StagingProcessDownloads directory for files older than the
CopyOutLifetime value. If the directory holds many files and it is not important to check
the lifetime each time the analyze_managed_product.pl script is run, you can improve
performance by increasing the value so the check is made less frequently. If the specified
value is 10, the lifetime check occur once over the course of 10 script executions.

The default value is 10.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-11


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

LifetimeProcessLimit
Specifies the maximum number of seconds the file lifetime check is allowed to continue.
The lifetime check randomly examines cached files. If the StagingProcessDownloads directory
consists of many files, this option has the effect of randomly processing a subset of files each
time the lifetime check takes place. Over time, all of the files are examined.

The default value is 300.


LogTypes
Specifies the type of logging to be reported. The following are valid log types:

NONE

ERROR

WARNING

INFORMATION

DEBUG

PERFORMANCE

ALL

Note:
Use the + sign to use multiple log types. For example, ERROR+WARNING.

RulesObject = Requirement Rules from ClearanceDB Server


Specify to perform analysis using the product's rules and conditions from the ClearanceDB
database. To enable this option, remove the number sign symbol (#) that precedes the
RulesObject = Requirement Rules from ClearanceDB Server line.
RulesObject = Variant Analysis
Specify to perform analysis using Teamcenter variant conditions. To enable this option, remove
the number sign symbol (#) that precedes the RulesObject = Variant Analysis line.
ResultsObject = ClearanceDB Results
Specify to generate a ClearanceDB results file (ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb). To enable
this option, remove the number sign symbol (#) that precedes the ResultsObject =
ClearanceDB Results line.
Attribute=__PLM_ABSOCC_UID, Part and Parents (Part First)

15-12 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Specify to use absolute occurrence IDs

Specify to use product structure absolute occurrences. To enable this option, remove the
number sign symbol (#) that precedes the Attribute=__PLM_ABSOCC_UID,Part and Parents
(Part First) line.

3. Save the file.

Specify to use absolute occurrence IDs

For ClearanceDB to work with data from Teamcenter, an absolute occurrence ID is required for each
product structure node of the BOM line to be analyzed.

1. Enable absolute occurrence IDs in the global configuration options (specified in the
Clearance.cfgglobal file) by removing the number sign symbol (#) that precedes the
Attribute=__PLM_ABSOCC_UID,Part and Parents (Part First) line.

2. Add the following entry to the process configuration (specified in the configuration.csvcldb file)
for each product:

"000092/A;1-cottonpicker (View)",EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,__PLM_ABSOCC_UID

Configure the Clearance.cfgproduct file

For the Clearance Calculator to analyze Teamcenter managed data, you must specify the item ID and
revision of the top level assembly of your product. If your Teamcenter data is configured with multifield
key data, you must specify the item key.

1. Use a text editor, open the Clearance.cfgproduct file for the product and provide the following
information:
ItemKey
Specifies the Teamcenter values of the multifield key properties for the item containing your
product.

Note:
This setting is applicable only to Teamcenter products configured with multifield key data.
It corresponds to the –key argument for the Teamcenter BOMwriter utility.
You can obtain the necessary multifield key strings with the Teamcenter get_key_string
utility.

ItemId
Specifies the Teamcenter item ID of the top level assembly of your product.
ItemRevision
Specifies the Teamcenter revision of the top level assembly of your product.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-13


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

2. Save the file.

Encrypt the Teamcenter user password

You can use the Teamcenter install utility to encrypt the Teamcenter user password. The encrypted
password is stored in an external file.

1. In an environment configured to run Teamcenter utilities, open a command prompt.

For information about configuring an environment to run Teamcenter utilities, see Manually
configure your environment for Teamcenter utilities in Utilities Reference in the Teamcenter help.

2. At the command prompt, type:

install –encryptpwf –f=<path>

where

path is the full path and file name for the password file that you want to generate.

Example:
install –encryptpwf –f=C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\account_key

The install utility displays the following message:

Please enter password:

3. Type the password and press Enter.

The utility displays the following message:

Please re-enter the password:

4. Type the password again and press Enter.

The password is encrypted and saved to the specified location.

5. Navigate to the ClearanceDB Work Area.

6. Open the Clearance.cfgglobal file or a Clearance.cfgproduct file in a text editor.

7. To specify for ClearanceDB to obtain the Teamcenter user password from the encrypted password
file, locate the TeamcenterUserPasswordFile setting, and type the full path and file name for the
password file.

15-14 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Configuring ClearanceDB for multifield key data

Example:
TeamcenterUserPasswordFile=C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\account_key

8. Save the file.

Configuring ClearanceDB for multifield key data

Multifield keys are identifiers assigned to objects to ensure their uniqueness in the database. For
example, if the item business object type is configured to use multifield keys, it is possible to have
two item objects with the same item ID.

For ClearanceDB to analyze Teamcenter data configured with multifield key data, you must do the
following:

• When running the create_product.pl script to create the product in the ClearanceDB database,
append the __PLM_ITEMREV_UID for the item revision to the product name.

To find the UID for an item revision, open the item revision in Structure Manager, and view the
bl_rev_fnd0objectId property. Include this value within brackets after the (View) suffix, enclosing the
entire product name in quotation marks, as shown below:

Example:
“000092/A;1-cottonpicker (View) [4BYKHklYy$_loP]”

• When configuring the Clearance.cfgproduct file for the product, populate the ItemKey parameter
with the multifield key properties of the item. This setting corresponds to the –key argument for the
Teamcenter BOMwriter utility.

To obtain the key information, use the Teamcenter get_key_string utility.

Example:
ItemKey=item_id=000092,MFK_strkey1=val1

Optionally configure Teamcenter export for 4GD worksets

When you export 4GD data to PLM XML, you can export design element properties that are in addition
to the properties that are exported by default. To do this, you must add the properties to the PLM XML
transfer mode. You may also customize the titles of the properties for the .plmxml file.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-15


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

Add the property to the PLM XML transfer mode

To include the additional property, you must edit the transfer mode used for exporting data from
Teamcenter by adding the property derived from the 4GD root business object Cpd0DesignElement.

1. In Teamcenter, start the PLM XML/TC XML Export Import Administration application.

Note:
For more information, see the PLM XML/TC XML Export Import Administration application
documentation in the Teamcenter help.

2. Select the 4GDPIEDataExportTcVisClearanceDB transfer mode from the PLM XML Import Export
Modes tree.

The TransferMode pane appears, with the options for the selected transfer mode.

3. Expand 4GDPIEDataExportTcVisClearanceDB in the left pane, and select


4GDPIEDataExportCLDB_PS.

4. Create the clause that specifies how the data is traversed:

a. Click the Add clause button located to the right of the clause table.

b. Select CLASS from the Primary Object Class Type list.

c. Type Cpd0DesignElement in the Primary Object box.

d. Select PROPERTY from the Relation Type list.

e. Type object_name in the Related Property Or Object box.

f. Select DO from the Property Action Type list.

g. Click the Modify button.

Customize the property title in the .plmxml file

When the property is added to the property set, it is exported to the PLM XML with its name as
object_name. You can change this to a more specific name.

1. Open the rule file 4GD_cldb.csv at this location:

TC_DATA\xformer\LLTCXML_PLMXML

15-16 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Optionally configure Teamcenter export for 4GD worksets

2. Under the Cpd0DesignElement business object, in the ProductRevisionView section, add the
ProductRevisionView/UserData rule as shown in this example, where DesignElementName is the
new name you want to create for the property.

#########################################
# Cpd0DesignElement
#########################################
Cpd0DesignElement|ProductInstance
Cpd0DesignElement.object_name|ProductInstance.name
Cpd0DesignElement<fnd0affectedObject.Mdl0VariantExprBlock.fnd0express
ions>
Cfg0ApplicationVariantExp.fnd0formula|ProductInstance/UserData|
add_user_value($TARGET_END_OBJECT
Cpd0DesignElement.owning_user>User.user_name|ProductInstance/
UserData|
add_user_value($TARGET_END_OBJECT
Cpd0DesignElement.owning_group>Group.name|ProductInstance/UserData|
add_user_value($TARGET_END_OBJECT

Cpd0DesignElement|ProductInstance.partRef>ProductRevisionView

Cpd0DesignElement|Occurrence
Cpd0DesignElement.puid|Occurrence/UserData|
add_user_value($TARGET_END_OBJECT
Cpd0DesignElement|Occurrence.instanceRefs>ProductInstance
Cpd0DesignElement<cpd0presented_parent.Cpd0DesignElement|
Occurrence.occurrenceRefs>Occurrence
Cpd0DesignElement|Occurrence.partRef>ProductRevisionView
Cpd0DesignElement.cpd0UG_ENTITY_HANDLE|Occurrence/UserData|
add_user_value($TARGET_END_OBJECT

Cpd0DesignElement|ProductRevisionView
Cpd0DesignElement.object_name|ProductRevisionView.name

Cpd0DesignElement.object_name|ProductRevisionView/UserData|add_user_value
($TARGET_END_OBJECT, 'DesignElementName', '',$SOURCE_VALUES, false, false)

Cpd0DesignElement.cpd0source_object>ItemRevision.items_tag>Item.fnd0i
s_
monolithic|ProductRevisionView/UserData|
add_user_value($TARGET_END_OBJECT
Cpd0DesignElement<cpd0presented_parent.Cpd0DesignElement|
ProductRevisionView.
instanceRefs>ProductInstance
Cpd0DesignElement<mdl0positioned_object.Mdl0DefaultGeometry|
ProductRevisionView/Representation
Cpd0DesignElement<mdl0positioned_object.Mdl0DefaultGeometry.
mdl0direct_model_data>Dataset.object_type|ProductRevisionView/
Representation.format|lookup_table( DSFormatList

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-17


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

3. Near the beginning of the file, add the ProductRevisionView rule as shown in this example.

!source_hierarchy Cpd0WorksetLine\BOMLine
!source_hierarchy Cpd0SubsetLine\BOMLine
!source_hierarchy Cpd0WorksetRevision\ItemRevision

!target_graph_definition UserValue.title

!target_graph_definition UserValue.value
!target_id_reference InstanceGraph.rootRefs|*.id
!target_id_reference ProductRevisionView.instanceRefs|*.id
!target_id_reference ProductView.rootRefs|*.id

|ProductView/ApplicationRef.application| 'NX'|
@ProductView.usage == 'modelView'

|InstanceGraph.$CHILD_ELEMENT|
concat(@@InstanceGraph.$CHILD_ELEMENT>$MAPPED
|InstanceGraph.$CHILD_ELEMENT|
concat(@@InstanceGraph.$CHILD_ELEMENT>$MAPPED

|ProductView.$CHILD_ELEMENT|
concat(@@ProductView.$CHILD_ELEMENT>$MAPPED
|ProductRevisionView/UserData/UserValue| remove_object($SOURCE_VALUE)|
@UserValue.title == 'object_name'

#########################################
# BOMWindow
#########################################

Caching managed data for analysis

You can configure ClearanceDB to use the load_fcccache utility to download and cache model data
from the Teamcenter server to your local machine, improving both the reliability and performance of the
analysis. Options to control the load_fcccache utility are located in the Clearance.cfgglobal file.

Note:
For most of these settings the default values are recommended and they should not be modified
unless you understand how the changes will affect the data staging process. Exceptions include

• JtDataStagingProcess — By default the load_fcccache option is disabled and you must change
this setting to enable it.

• CopyOutLocation — This setting specifies where to copy the files cached from Teamcenter.

15-18 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Caching managed data for analysis

• LogTypes — This setting controls the content of the log files.

For more information on the Teamcenter File Management System (FMS), see System Administration in
the Teamcenter help.

1. Using a text editor, open Clearance.cfgglobal and adjust the following settings:
JtDataStagingProcess
Specifies to use the Teamcenter load_fcccache utility to download the model data from the
Teamcenter server to the local system for clearance analysis. Enabling this option pre-populates
the FMS client cache (FCC), which leads to faster and more reliable analysis.

Valid values are 0 (off) or 1 (on). The default value is 0.


JtDataStagingProcessErrorLimit
Specifies when to abort the analyze_managed_product.pl script, based on the following
custom error codes:

FILECOPY_FAILED
INVALID_DAKID_FORMAT
FCC_OPENFILE_FAILED
FCC_DOWNLOAD_FAILED
GET_READ_TICKET_FAILED
DATASET_READ_FAILED
PLMXML_MISSING_JT
CHMOD_FAILED
COPYOUT_CLEANUP_FAILED

You can specify a numerical value for each error code. By default, the error codes are given
values that correspond to the severity of the problem, with the lowest value representing the
most severe failure. If a value is not specified for the JtDataStagingProcessErrorLimit setting,
the script stops whenever an error occurs during the staging process.

The default value is 30.

Note:
The default values are recommended for the JtDataStagingProcessErrorLimit setting
and the related error codes. Essentially, with these defaults the clearance analysis will
abort when any of these errors occur, and you can use the reported error message to
troubleshoot the problem.

FILECOPY_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a copy operation to the output directory has failed.

The default value is 20.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-19


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

INVALID_DAKID_FORMAT
Specifies the error code that indicates an invalid DAKID was found.

The default value is 21.


FCC_OPENFILE_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates the FCC failed to open the file using the ticket.

The default value is 22.


FCC_DOWNLOAD_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a failure most likely due to a missing file in the volume.

The default value is 23.


GET_READ_TICKET_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a read ticket failed.

The default value is 24.


DATASET_READ_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates no read access on the dataset.

The default value is 25.


PLMXML_MISSING_JT
Specifies the error code that indicates a missing JT file reference in the .plmxml file.

The default value is 26.


CHMOD_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a failure to set the access mode during copy out.

The default value is 27.


COPYOUT_CLEANUP_FAILED
Specifies the error code that indicates a failure to remove a file during lifetime cleanup.

The default value is 28.


CopyOutLocation
Specifies the location for the dataset files downloaded from Teamcenter server.

The default location is the product directory in the ClearanceDB Work Area.

15-20 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Caching managed data for analysis

Note:
Do not use special characters in folder names.

BucketCount
Specifies how many directories to use for the cached files. Spreading the files over multiple
directories can lead to better performance.

The default value is 30.


UseAbsoluteLocation
Specifies to use an absolute value for the location attribute in the .plmxml file generated by the
BOMwriter. It is usually better to have a relative reference, although there are instances where
an absolute reference is required, such as when the .plmxml file is moved to a different location
from the referenced files.

The default value is No.

BucketPrefix
Specifies a prefix to add to the names of directories created to hold the cached files.

The default value is RW.


FilenamePrefix
Specifies a prefix to add to the names of the cached files.

The default value is fmsr_.


CopyOutLifetime
Specifies the lifetime of the files cached in the StagingProcessDownloads directory. The
directory is scanned for files older than the specified value, which are removed. The lifetime
value is specified in seconds, where one day is equal to 86400 seconds and two weeks is equal
to 1209600 seconds.

The default value is 1209600 (two weeks).

Note:
This option requires the FilenamePrefix option to be set since it uses the prefix as
validation of ownership to prevent the accidental removal of files.

LifetimeCheck
Specifies to scan the StagingProcessDownloads directory for files older than the
CopyOutLifetime value.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-21


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

Valid values are 0 (off) or 1 (on). The default value is 0.


LifetimeCheckInterval
Specifies how often to scan the StagingProcessDownloads directory for files older than the
CopyOutLifetime value. If the directory holds many files and it is not important to check
the lifetime each time the analyze_managed_product.pl script is run, you can improve
performance by increasing the value so the check is made less frequently. If the specified
value is 10, the lifetime check occur once over the course of 10 script executions.

The default value is 10.


LifetimeProcessLimit
Specifies the maximum number of seconds the file lifetime check is allowed to continue.
The lifetime check randomly examines cached files. If the StagingProcessDownloads directory
consists of many files, this option has the effect of randomly processing a subset of files each
time the lifetime check takes place. Over time, all of the files are examined.

The default value is 300.


LogTypes
Specifies the type of logging to be reported. The following are valid log types:

NONE

ERROR

WARNING

INFORMATION

DEBUG

PERFORMANCE

ALL

Note:
Use the + sign to use multiple log types. For example, ERROR+WARNING.

2. Save the file.

Set the default owner for each clearance result

To show the default owner for clearance results, you must set the default owner attribute in the
BOMwriter, which is then included in the generated .plmxml file.

15-22 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Analyze managed ClearanceDB products

1. In the Clearance.cfgglobal file, add the following attribute under the BomWriterUserAttributes
section:

BomWriterUserAttributes=target:Instance,key:"Item Revision
Owning User",prop:bl_rev_owning_user,key:"Last Modified
Date",prop:awb0RevisionLastModifiedDate

2. In the configuration.csvcldb file, add the following attributes:

<product name>,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,Last Modified Date

<product name>,EAICL_RELEVANT_PART_ATTRIBUTE,Item Revision Owning User

<product name>,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_ASSIGNMENT,ON

<product name>,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE,Item Revision Owning


User

<product name>,EAICL_INITIAL_CLEARANCE_OWNER_CHOICE_CRITERION,Last
Modified Date

The configuration file changes can be added in the default product’s configuration.csvcldb and
then copied to all new products when they are created by using either the -uc (copy default
product's configuration.csvcldb file) or -ua (copy all default product's configuration files) flag in the
create_product.pl command line call. Alternatively, the configuration file changes can be added to
the individual product’s configuration.csvcldb file.

Analyzing managed ClearanceDB products

Analyze managed ClearanceDB products

Analysis of managed products is performed via the analyze_managed_product.pl script, which triggers
the following events in sequence:

1. The BOMwriter utility generates a .plmxml file referencing the Teamcenter product data.

2. The load_fcccache utility downloads the product data to your local machine. A second .plmxml file
referencing the cached data is generated.

3. The Clearance Calculator analyzes the cached data according to a ClearanceDB product
configuration (defined in the configuration.csvcldb file, together with any specified rules,
conditions, and zones). ClearanceDB results are generated and uploaded to the ClearanceDB
database.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-23


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

Analyze a managed product

Take the following steps to perform a ClearanceDB analysis upon a Teamcenter managed product.

15-24 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Analyze a managed product

1. Configure the Clearance Calculator, as described in the Configure the Clearance Calculator section
in ClearanceDB ─ Administration.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-25


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

2. Navigate to the appropriate product directory in your ClearanceDB Work Area.

3. From the command prompt, type

analyze_managed_product.pl <product>

Example:
analyze_managed_product.pl flux_capacitor

Depending upon how you set the RunLevel parameter in the Clearance.cfgglobal file, one or
more of the following actions are performed:

This RunLevel Does this


setting
1 In the product directory, a .vvi file is created, which is used by the BOMwriter to
generate a .plmxml file referencing the managed data.
2 Using the .vvi and .plmxml files in the product directory, the Clearance
Calculator performs analysis upon the managed product data and generates
a results file.
3 The results file is uploaded to the ClearanceDB database.
4 Both the RunLevel 1 and 2 actions are performed.
5 Both the RunLevel 2 and 3 actions are performed.
6 All of the RunLevel actions are performed, 1, 2, and 3.

The analysis runs, and when it is complete the clearance results file,
ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb, appears in the product directory.

Example output from managed analysis

The command line output below is from a successful ClearanceDB analysis of a Teamcenter managed
product.

C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-
Front_Suspension__view_>analyze_managed_product.pl

#-----------------------------------------
# analyze_managed_product.pl
#-----------------------------------------

#-----------------------------------------
# Teamcenter Configuration:
# TC_ROOT=Y:\
# TC_DATA=Z:\

15-26 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Example output from managed analysis

# TeamcenterUserId=tcuser
# RevisionRule=Latest Working
# RunLevel=6
# JtDataStagingProcess=1
#-----------------------------------------

"141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_.vvi" file is
created in the product directory. Please
verify it.

#-----------------------------------------
# Step 1a of 3: Run Bomwriter.exe
#-----------------------------------------

Running:
Y:\\bin\bomwriter -u=tcuser -p=xxxxxxxx
-g= -item="141-f10002" -rev=A -format=plmxml+type=
AbsoluteOccurrences+ua=target:Root,key:Configuration,literal:"Latest Working"
-revision_rule="Latest
Working" -output_file="C:/ClearanceDB_Work_Area/Products/141-f10002_A_1-
Front_Suspension__view_/
141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_.plmxml"

platform=MSWin32
C:/ClearanceDB_Work_Area/Products/141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_/
bomwriter_exec.bat
C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_>set TC_ROOT=Y:\

C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_>set TC_DATA=Z:\

C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_>call
Z:\\tc_profilevars

#-----------------------------------------
# Bomwriter.exe execution SUCCEEDED
# Execution time = 00:15:03
#-----------------------------------------

#-----------------------------------------
# Step 1b of 3: Run Load_fcccache.exe
#-----------------------------------------

Staging process uses config file: C:/ClearanceDB_Work_Area/Clearance.cfgglobal


The staging process saved the original plmxml as: C:/ClearanceDB_Work_Area/Products/
141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_/141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view__orig.plmxml
Warning: Invalid "CopyOutLocation" in the configuration file. Use product dir by default.

Running:
Y:\\bin\load_fcccache -u=tcuser -p=xxxxxxxx
-config=C:/ClearanceDB_Work_Area/Clearance.cfgglobal
-f=load -plmxml=C:/ClearanceDB_Work_Area/Products/141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_/
141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view__orig.plmxml -output_plmxml=C:/
ClearanceDB_Work_Area/
Products/141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_/141-f10002_A_1-
Front_Suspension__view_.plmxml
-copy_out=C:/ClearanceDB_Work_Area/Products/141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_/
StagingProcessDownloads -log_filename=C:/ClearanceDB_Work_Area/Products/
141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_/JtDataStagingProcess.log

platform=MSWin32

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-27


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

C:/ClearanceDB_Work_Area/Products/141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_/stage_exec.bat
C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_>set TC_ROOT=Y:\

C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_>set TC_DATA=Z:\

C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_>call
Z:\\tc_profilevars
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.462Z: Setting logTypes to: -1
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.462Z: Setting minor error: FILECOPY_FAILED, error code: 20
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.478Z: Setting minor error: INVALID_DAKID_FORMAT, error code: 21
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.478Z: Setting minor error: FCC_OPENFILE_FAILED, error code: 22
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.478Z: Setting minor error: FCC_DOWNLOAD_FAILED, error code: 23
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.478Z: Setting
minor error: GET_READ_TICKET_FAILED, error code: 24
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.493Z: Setting minor error: DATASET_READ_FAILED, error code: 25
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.493Z: Setting minor error: PLMXML_MISSING_JT, error code: 26
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.493Z: Setting minor error: CHMOD_FAILED, error code: 27
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.493Z: Setting
minor error: COPYOUT_CLEANUP_FAILED, error code: 28
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.509Z: Setting BucketCount to: 30
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.509Z: Setting UseAbsoluteLocation to: No
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.603Z: Setting DirAccessMode to: 0750 (488)
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.618Z: Setting FileAccessMode to: 0640 (416)
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.618Z: Setting BucketPrefix to: RW
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.618Z: Setting FilenamePrefix to: fmsr_
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.618Z: Setting CopyOutLifetime to: 1209600
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.618Z: Setting LifetimeCheck to: 0
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.618Z: Setting the LifetimeCheckInterval to: 10
DEBUG 2023-02-09T19:21:16.634Z: Setting the LifetimeProcessLimit to: 300
FCC Interface Implementation fms.8.2.0.20091029.01(fms.8.2.0.20091029.01) initialized.

#-----------------------------------------
# Load_fcccache.exe execution SUCCEEDED
# Execution time = 00:13:05
#-----------------------------------------

#-----------------------------------------
# Step 2 of 3: Run Clearance.exe
#-----------------------------------------

Running:
C:/ClearanceDB_Work_Area/Products/141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_/
clearance_exec.bat
C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_>set
VP_AUTO_TESTING=True

C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_>set
EAI_CL_DATASOURCE=
cldbmachine:7206

C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_>set
EAI_CL_CONNECT_DATA=
CLDB_PROXY_CONNECT

C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_>set
PATH=C:\Perl\bin;
C:\WINDOWS;C:\WINDOWS\System32;C:\vis\Products\Mockup\ClearanceDB

C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-
Front_Suspension__view_>C:\vis\Products\Mockup\

15-28 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Example output from managed analysis

clearance.exe -d 5 -c
C:/ClearanceDB_Work_Area/Products/141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_/
141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_.vvi

Teamcenter Visualization Clearance Testing.


Launching worker process.
Creating clearance components.
Loading input file.
Performing clearance test.
Generating pairs.
Product = 141-f10002/A;1-Front Suspension (view)(Latest Working)
2023/02/09-14:30:41: Connected to ClearanceDB Proxy on machine cldbmachine, at port 7206.
2023/02/09-14:30:44: Reconnected to
ClearanceDB Proxy on machine cldbmachine, at port 7206.
2023/02/09-14:30:45: Reconnected to
ClearanceDB Proxy on machine cldbmachine, at port 7206.
Number of unique rules = 1
2023/02/09-14:30:48: Reconnected to
ClearanceDB Proxy on machine cldbmachine, at port 7206.
2023/02/09-14:30:49: Reconnected to
ClearanceDB Proxy on machine cldbmachine, at port 7206.
The statistics of 141-f10002/A;1-Front Suspension (view):
Number of element occurrences = 55
Number of unchanged element occurrences = 0
Number of excluded element occurrences = 0

The requirement engine called total of 1461 times.


Clearance test bed has been created with
CADID matching keyed by PART names.
All pairs have been generated.
Processing pairs.
Launching 2 processes for analysis.
Process 1: All pairs have been processed.
Process 2: All pairs have been processed.
Generating results.
Testing finished. Results written to 'ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb'.
Process ended normally.

#-----------------------------------------
# Clearance.exe execution SUCCEEDED
# Execution time = 00:01:12
#-----------------------------------------

#-----------------------------------------
# Step 3 of 3: Run Update_product.pl
#-----------------------------------------

Running:
C:\vis\Products\Mockup\ClearanceDB\update_product.pl -ud

No local .dbc file in the product directory.


Looking for global version(s) in ClearanceDB_Work_Area directory ....

Uploading via ClearanceDb Proxy .....

2023/02/09-14:31:09: Connecting to Clearance Database...

2023/02/09-14:31:09: Connected to ClearanceDB Proxy on machine cldbmachine, at port 7206.


2023/02/09-14:31:09: Successfully connected to Clearance Database.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-29


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

2023/02/09-14:31:09: Lock the Clearance Database for results update...

2023/02/09-14:31:11: Starting upload for C:/ClearanceDB_Work_Area/Products/


141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_/ClearanceResultsDbUpload.csvcldb ...

2023/02/09-14:31:11: 100% complete.

2023/02/09-14:31:11: Starting merge results.


This could take quite a while, please be patient...

2023/02/09-14:31:17: Merge successful.

2023/02/09-14:31:17: Upload successful.

#-----------------------------------------
# Update_product.pl execution SUCCEEDED
# Execution time = 00:00:08
#-----------------------------------------

#--------------------------------------------------------------------
# analyze_managed_product.pl complete
#
# Step 1a: Bomwriter.exe. Result = SUCCEEDED. Time=00:15:03
# Step 1b: Load_fcccache.exe. Result = SUCCEEDED. Time=00:13:05
# Step 2: Clearance.exe. Result = SUCCEEDED. Time=00:01:12
# Step 3: Update_product.pl. Result = SUCCEEDED. Time=00:00:08
# Total Time = 00:29:31
#---------------------------------------------------------------------
Completed: Tue Feb 9 14:31:17
C:\ClearanceDB_Work_Area\Products\141-f10002_A_1-Front_Suspension__view_>

View results in the Lifecycle Viewer and Structure Manager

View results in the Lifecycle Viewer

1. In My Teamcenter, right-click the item revision containing your product data and choose Send
To→Lifecycle Viewer.

The dataset opens in the Lifecycle Viewer.

2. Choose Clearance→Preferences→Requirement Components.

3. In the Requirement Rule Components dialog box, select the Requirement Rules from
ClearanceDB Server check box, and then click OK.

4. On the 3D Clearance toolbar, click Load Results .

5. In the Load Clearance Results dialog box, from the Files of Type list, choose ClearanceDB
DataBase Connection (*.dbc).

15-30 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Work with Design Context

6. Select your DataBase Connection (DBC) file, and click Open.

The 3D model and the database content are matched by the name of the top-level assembly node.
Results are displayed in the Results list.

View results in Structure Manager

1. In My Teamcenter, right-click the item revision containing your product data and choose Send
To→Structure Manager.

The Structure Manager opens and displays the product structure.

2. Choose View→Show/Hide Data Panel.

3. In the Data Panel, click the Viewer tab.

The visualization components load and the Structure Manager embedded viewer opens.

4. Choose Graphics→Clearance→Preferences→Clearance→Requirements.

5. In the Requirement Rule Components dialog box, select the Requirement Rules from
ClearanceDB Server check box, and then click OK.

6. Right-click the embedded viewer toolbar area and choose 3D Clearance.

The 3D Clearance toolbar is displayed.

7. On the 3D Clearance toolbar, click Load Results .

8. In the Load Clearance Results dialog box, from the Files of Type list, choose ClearanceDB
DataBase Connection (*.dbc).

9. Select your DataBase Connection (DBC) file, and click Open.

The 3D model and the database content are matched by the name of the top-level assembly node.
Results are displayed in the Results list.

Working with Design Context

Work with Design Context

You can combine ClearanceDB with Teamcenter's Design Context application to create an Integrated
Clearance Management (ICM) system. Design Context identifies a series of target parts and then quickly
finds other relevant data within a given proximity to those parts. This data can be sent to ClearanceDB
to perform clearance analysis in database query (batch) mode or real-time mode. Results are displayed

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-31


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

in Design Context, and also can be sent to the Structure Manager, the Lifecycle Viewer, or standalone
Mockup for display and further analysis.

ClearanceDB accepts any pruned or full product structure provided it is represented by a JT file in the
Teamcenter database. Any parts for which JT data is not available are not included in the clearance
analysis. The product structure also should be searchable in Design Context.

The ICM system offers two clearance analysis modes:

• Database query mode

In database query mode, the ClearanceDB administrator creates a batch process to perform clearance
analysis periodically as a background task, typically every night. The batch process invokes the
Clearance Calculator to perform the analysis and uploads the results to the ClearanceDB database.
The Design Context end user can then evaluate the results, identify issues, and assign the issues via
a workflow to designers to analyze and resolve within other applications such as the Lifecycle Viewer,
Structure Manager, NX, or other CAD package.

• Real-time mode

In real-time mode, the rich client user selects target and background Bill of Materials (BOM) lines in
Design Context, and then invokes a clearance analysis that is performed in real time. Typically, this
option is used to make on-the-fly clearance calculations after design changes or prior to releasing a
part. Teamcenter runs these calculations in the background, allowing the end user to continue with
other work while waiting for the results. Results are displayed in the Design Context Issues panes.

A SCO (Structure Context Object) containing the clearance results can also be created in the Newstuff
folder, provided the RDVCreateSCOForClearance preference is set to true. The SCO can be opened
in a subsequent session to retrieve the selected product structure lines and analysis results.

Note:
For more information on using Design Context, see Design Context in the Teamcenter help.

Design Context clearance analysis modes

Database query mode

The ClearanceDB administrator configures the scope of the analysis and the Design Context end user can
only view the results. The end user can use the Design Context search engine capabilities to focus upon
particular parts.

Clearance issues are displayed in one of the following Issues panes:

• Target-Target Issues

15-32 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Design Context clearance analysis modes

Shows clearance issues among all the appearances in the Design Context target appearances table in
the third window. The specific issue between each pair of parts is listed.

• Target-Background Issues

Shows clearance issues among target parts against all the appearances in the Design Context
background appearances table in the third window. The specific issue between each pair of parts
is listed.

• Target-Other Issues

Teamcenter displays each pair of parts that violate one of the defined clearance rules. All violations are
shown in the context of the selected target part appearance or appearances. For each violation, the
following information is listed:

• Type

The clearance violation type.

• Result

The calculated violation with respect to the requirement.

• Requirement

The required clearance.

• Location

The x,y,z coordinates of the violation.

Note:
You can also view additional results information such as issue Status, Priority, and Date
First Found. To update the selection of columns shown in the Issues panes, modify the
ClearanceDBShownColumns preference in the rich client.

Real-time mode

Real-time clearance analysis is a two step process. The first step is to create search criteria for the
clearance calculation. The second step is to send the search criteria to Design Context to see the
clearance analysis results.

To perform real-time clearance analysis, the end user manually selects BOM lines of interest in Design
Context. BOM lines involved in the analysis process are Design Context target parts. The user selects
these parts from the target and background BOM lines that are configured in the Design Context third

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-33


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

window. Global background parts cannot be included in a real-time clearance analysis. If particular BOM
lines are not selected, all BOM lines in the target appearances are considered target parts.

Teamcenter analyzes the BOM lines selected as Design Context target parts against all other BOM lines in
the Design Context third window. It presents the issues in the following categories:

• Target parts against all the appearances in the Design Context target appearances table in the third
window.

• Target parts against all the appearances in the Design Context background appearances table in the
third window.

Optionally, Teamcenter may create an SCO (Structure Context Object) in the Newstuff folder containing
information about the session. The SCO can be opened in a subsequent session to retrieve the selected
product structure lines and analysis results.

Note:
Creation of an SCO is optional and occurs only if the RDVCreateSCOForClearance preference is
set to true in the rich client.

Specify connection information for Design Context

For Design Context to connect with the ClearanceDB database, you must use the Teamcenter
RDVClearanceProxyServers preference to specify the ClearanceDB connection information.

Note:
You must have Teamcenter administrator rights to modify the RDVClearanceProxyServers
preference.

1. Log on to the rich client as the administrator.

2. Choose Edit→Options.

3. At the bottom of the Options dialog box, click Search.

4. In the Search On Keywords box, type RDVClearanceProxyServers, and then click the
magnifying glass icon to search for the preference.

5. In the Preferences List, select RDVClearanceProxyServers.

6. In the Current Values box, type your connection information according to the following syntax:

<machine_name>:<port>:<connection_name>

15-34 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Specify to create an SCO for clearance results

where

For this parameter Type this


machine_name The name of the system running the ClearanceDB Proxy or Oracle Client.
port The port number used for the ClearanceDB connection.
connection_name The name of the Oracle connection.

7. Click the + sign to the right of the Current Values box.

Note:
The RDVClearanceProxyServers preference can consist of multiple ClearanceDB
connections. For each additional connection that you want to establish, type the required
connection information as described above and then click the + sign to the right of the
Current Values box to update the preference.

8. Click Modify.

Specify to create an SCO for clearance results

Set the RDVCreateSCOForClearance preference to true if you want to create an SCO (Structure
Context Object) after performing real-time analysis.

Note:
You must have Teamcenter administrator rights to modify the RDVCreateSCOForClearance
preference.

1. Log on to the rich client as the administrator.

2. Choose Edit→Options.

3. At the bottom of the Options dialog box, click Search.

4. In the Search On Keywords box, type RDVCreateSCOForClearance, and then click the
magnifying glass icon to search for the preference.

5. In the Preferences List, select RDVCreateSCOForClearance.

6. In the Current Values box, type true.

7. Click Modify.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-35


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

Display additional clearance results information

Modify the ClearanceDBShownColumns preference to display additional clearance results information


in the Design Context Issues panes.

Note:
You must have Teamcenter administrator rights to modify the ClearanceDBShownColumns
preference.

1. Log on to the rich client as the administrator.

2. Choose Edit→Options.

3. At the bottom of the Options dialog box, click Search.

4. In the Search On Keywords box, type ClearanceDBShownColumns, and then click the
magnifying glass icon to search for the preference.

5. In the Preferences List, select ClearanceDBShownColumns.

6. In the Current Values box, type the names of the ClearanceDB results columns that you want to
display.

7. Click Modify.

Load ClearanceDB results in Design Context

1. Choose Tools→Clearance Analysis.

2. In the Clearance Analysis dialog box, select Query the database for existing results.

3. Click Start Analysis.

After a delay that depends on the quantity of stored data, Teamcenter displays the retrieved
clearance issues in one of the Issues panes.

4. To view the associated parts in the embedded viewer, select one or more issues and click the
Communicate to Design Context button.

Teamcenter opens the relevant BOM lines in Design Context, allowing you to examine the
clearance details in the embedded viewer.

Alternatively, you can also view the parts associated with one or more selected issues in standalone
Teamcenter lifecycle visualization mockup if you click the Start/Open In TcVis button.

15-36 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Perform real-time analysis

Perform real-time analysis

1. Select the product structure lines of interest in the third Design Context window. If you do not
select any lines, Teamcenter includes all appearances in the third Design Context window in the
analysis.

2. Choose Tools→Clearance Analysis.

3. In the Clearance Analysis dialog box, select Perform Real-Time Clearance Analysis.

4. Click Start Analysis.

A progress bar shows the percentage completion of the calculation, and you can click Cancel above
the progress bar to terminate the process if necessary. After a delay that depends on the scope of
the query, Teamcenter displays the clearance issues in one of the Issues panes.

5. Click OK on the form.

Note:
Real-time analysis results are not stored in the ClearanceDB database. If you want to preserve
them, you must create an SCO (Structure Context Object) object. You can open the SCO in a
subsequent session to retrieve the selected product structure lines and analysis results. The
RDVCreateSCOForClearance preference must be set to true for an SCO to be created.

Open clearance results in an SCO

1. In your Newstuff folder, right-click the SCO containing your results and choose Send To→Design
Context.

Teamcenter opens the results in the first Design Context window.

2. Click Finish.

Teamcenter opens the third Design Context window.

Note:
Click Yes on any confirmation dialog boxes that are displayed.

3. Choose Tools→Clearance Analysis.

Teamcenter displays the Clearance Analysis dialog box.

4. Select Display Cached Results from SCO and then click Start Analysis.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-37


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

After a delay that depends on the quantity of stored data, Teamcenter displays the retrieved
clearance issues in one of the Issues panes.

Working with variants

Understanding variant-based clearance analysis

Variant-based clearance analysis uses product variant information stored in Teamcenter. Analyses can be
performed on a 150% BOM structure, which is the union of two or more product variants. Non-buildable
combinations of product structure are detected and excluded from the clearance analysis.

The benefits of removing non-buildable occurrence relationships from the ClearanceDB analysis include
the following:

• Eliminate results between non-buildable product configurations.

• Faster clearance analysis.

• Fewer clearance incidents for engineers and designers to evaluate.

15-38 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Understanding variant-based clearance analysis

A simple example with variant conditions (150% BOM with variants)

Using variant analysis, a single 150% BOM can contain all buildable product combinations. This enables
you to perform a single clearance analysis, which excludes all non-buildable part pairs.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-39


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

With no variants, all nodes are analyzed (15 part pairs).


No nodes are excluded.

With the E=V6 variant, nodes 1, 2, 3, and 4 are analyzed (6 part pairs).
Nodes 5 and 6 are excluded (9 part pairs).

With the E=V8 variant, nodes 1, 2, 5, and 6 are analyzed (6 part pairs).
Nodes 3 and 4 are excluded (9 part pairs).

15-40 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Variant-based clearance analysis methods

A simple example without variant conditions (separate 100% BOMs)

Without using variant analysis, you must create and manage separate 100% BOMs to represent each
buildable product combination. You must evaluate each BOM with a separate clearance analysis.

For the analysis of the V6 Engine, without variant conditions, nodes 1, 2, 3, and 4
are analyzed (6 part pairs).
No nodes are excluded.

For the analysis of the V8 Engine, without variant conditions, nodes 1, 2, 5, and 6
are analyzed (6 part pairs).
No nodes are excluded.

For more information about working with Teamcenter variant conditions, see Structure Management on
Rich Client ─ Usage in the Teamcenter help.

Variant-based clearance analysis methods

You can perform variant-based clearance analysis using the following methods:

• Client-side

• No Teamcenter connection is required during the analysis.


• Can only be run in batch using Clearance.exe.

• Server-side

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-41


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

• Requires a connection to Teamcenter Product Configurator during the analysis.


• Can be run either interactively in Teamcenter lifecycle visualization or in batch using Clearance.exe.

See Product Configurator on Rich Client to learn more about creating, modifying, and managing variants
in Teamcenter.

Variant-based clearance analysis (client-side)

You must enable the option to evaluate ClearanceDB products according to Teamcenter variant
conditions.

1. Using a text editor, open Clearance.cfgglobal and adjust the following settings:

Note:
You can also specify these options in the Clearance.cfgproduct file for the product.

LexicographicalVariantAnalysis
Defines the mode of the evaluation of variant condition relational expressions. Choose one of
the following:

15-42 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Variant-based clearance analysis (client-side)

No — If indeterminable variant conditions exist, the affected variant inferences are asked from
the server. This is the default.

Yes — If indeterminable variant conditions exist, evaluate them lexicographically.

Note:
Variant conditions that cannot be evaluated based on textual representations are
indeterminable.

VariantAnalysisClientTraceFile
Specifies the name for the log file of the variant analysis. By default, this is not set, and a log file
is not generated.

Example:
VariantAnalysisClientTraceFile=cldb_variant_analysis.log

VariantAnalysisClientTraceFlags
Specified the content of the log file of the variant analysis. The trace flags are additive,
concatenated with the plus (+) character.

Example:
VariantAnalysisClientTraceFlags=CONFIGURATION+STATISTICS

Add any of the following flags:

CONFIGURATION Lists the variant analysis configuration attributes.


STATISTICS Provides the basic variant analysis statistics.
VARIANTCONDITIONS Provides details of textual variant conditions.
DETERMINABILITY Lists the determinability of variant conditions.
SATISFIABILITY Lists the satisfiability of variant conditions.
EXCLUDEDVCPAIRS Lists excluded variant condition pairs.
EXCUDEDUIDPAIRS Lists excluded clearance element pairs as ABSOCCs.
EXCLUDEDNGIDPAIRS Lists excluded clearance element pairs as NGIDs.
IMPACT Lists the impact of variant conditions on the product structure.

Caution:
Enabling the EXCUDEDUIDPAIRS and EXCLUDEDNGIDPAIRS trace flags may result in
extremely large log files.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-43


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

VariantLogicalExpression
Define the variant condition UserValue title and BOM line property pair in the .plmxml file. This
has the form of:

“Variant Condition”:bl_variant_condition

“Variant Formula”:bl_formula

Example:
VariantLogicalExpression="VC-V6:bl_variant_condition"

Note:
This must match the content of the BomWriterUserAttributes setting.

BomWriterUserAttributes
Specify the variant conditions for the BOMwriter to include in the generated .plmxml file. Type
these according to the following syntax:

target:Instance,key:myAttribute,literal:\"My Attribute Value\"

Note:
This is the same option as the bomwriter -ua= command line argument.

Example:
Use this option to include variant model related BOM line properties in the
generated .plmxml file. For example:
BomWriterUserAttributes=target:Instance,key: VC-V6,prop: bl_variant_condition

RulesObject = Variant Analysis


Specify to perform analysis using Teamcenter variant conditions. To enable this option, remove
the number sign symbol (#) that precedes the RulesObject = Variant Analysis line.

2. Save the file.

Variant-based clearance analysis (server-side)

Performing variant-based clearance analysis in Lifecycle Visualization

1. With an unconfigured .plmxml file open, choose Menu→Clearance→Preferences→Product


Configurator.

15-44 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Variant-based clearance analysis (server-side)

2. In the Product Configuration dialog box, do the following.

a. Select the Enable Product Configurator check box.

b. From the Variant Rule dropdown, select the desired variant rule to apply against the loaded
file during clearance analysis.

c. Click OK.

3. Run a clearance analysis.

Performing variant-based clearance analysis in batch

To perform variant analysis in batch mode (Clearance.exe) using Teamcenter Product Configurator,
complete the following steps.

1. Ensure that you are connected to Teamcenter and that the connection is maintained for the
duration of the analysis process.

2. Using a text editor, open Clearance.cfgglobal and adjust the following settings:

Note:
You can also specify these options in the Clearance.cfgproduct file for the product, which will
override settings in the Clearance.cfgglobal file.

EnableProductConfigurator
Enables Clearance.exe to use the Teamcenter Product Configurator to perform variant analysis.

Example:
EnableProductConfigurator=True

ProductConfiguratorVariantRule
Specifies the saved variant rule that is used for communicating with the Product Configurator.

Example:
ProductConfiguratorVariantRule=<valid variant rule>

VariantLogicalExpression
Define the variant condition UserValue title and BOM line property pair in the .plmxml file. This
has the form of:

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 15-45


© 2024 Siemens
15. Using ClearanceDB with Teamcenter

“Variant Condition”:bl_variant_condition

“Variant Formula”:bl_formula

Example:
VariantLogicalExpression="VC-V6:bl_variant_condition"

Note:
This must match the content of the BomWriterUserAttributes setting.

BomWriterUserAttributes
Specify the variant conditions for the BOMwriter to include in the generated .plmxml file. Type
these according to the following syntax:

target:Instance,key:myAttribute,literal:\"My Attribute Value\"

Note:
This is the same option as the bomwriter -ua= command line argument.

Example:
Use this option to include variant model related BOM line properties in the
generated .plmxml file. For example:
BomWriterUserAttributes=target:Instance,key: VC-V6,prop: bl_variant_condition

3. Save the file.

Using ClearanceDB with Active Workspace

Clone stable IDs

To view clearance results in Active Workspace, you must specify the clone stable ID for the BOMwriter to
include in the generated .plmxml file. You can specify this attribute in the Clearance.cfgglobal file if you
do not have specific metadata for every product, or in the Clearance.cfgproduct file if you have product
metadata.

Add the following attribute under the BomWriterUserAttributes section in either of the files identified
above.

BomWriterUserAttributes=target:Instance,key:__PLM_CLONE_STABLE_INST_UID,prop
:bl_clone_stable_occurrence_id

15-46 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
16. Maintaining the database
Database maintenance overview
This section provides information on maintaining and optimizing the database.

The administrator may choose execute stored procedures to delete obsolete objects, delete all data
associated with a product, copy all data associated with a product, or rename a product. In addition,
ClearanceDB automatically performs certain database maintenance functions to assure the integrity of
the data persisted in the ClearanceDB Oracle database.

Understanding the Simple Security Model


The Simple Security Model describes the supported modes of viewing and updating the ClearanceDB
database.

The viewing of clearance issues is unrestricted provided that the user can access the product JT data. If
the user can open the main assembly file that defines the product, the pertinent clearance results can be
loaded and visualized.

The updating of clearance issues in the Mockup client is unrestricted. The user can modify the following
clearance issue attributes:

• Resolution (includes Comment, Change Required?, Change Reference, and Item Important?)

• Owner

• Status

• Priority

• Zone

The user can modify these attributes in the Mockup Results list and save them locally in a text file.
Unrestricted local persistence provides for individual flexibility of data handling and does not affect other
users.

The ability to commit local clearance issue modifications to the database can be restricted and controlled
by the database configuration per product and the content of the Owner field per clearance issue.

For any given product, the database checks to see if the EAICL_UPDATE_SECURITY attribute value is set
to ON. If it is, then the database checks for the EAICL_PRODUCT_OWNER attribute. If the user's identity
matches this value, the user's modifications to the clearance issue status are committed to the database.
If EAICL_UPDATE_SECURITY is set to OFF, or not present in the product's configuration file, any user can
commit changes to the issue.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 16-1


© 2024 Siemens
16. Maintaining the database

Mockup users are identified to the database by user name. A number of users such as Oracle User
accounts should be allowed to update all the issues pertaining to a specific product. Additionally, users
identified in the Owner field of a clearance issue (Issue Owners) are always allowed to modify the
attributes of that issue.

Oracle User accounts are designated during the product configuration using the
EAICL_PRODUCT_OWNER attribute. Issue Owners can be designated in the following ways:

• By the database itself based on part metadata (for new issues only)

Note:
For the database to automatically specify an Issue Owner based upon part metadata, the part
attribute that defines the Issue Owner must be specified in the product configuration.
For any part pairs involved in a clearance issue, you also have the option of specifying that the
presence of a part attribute for one of the parts means that part takes precedence over the
other part.
For example, ownership may be based on metadata called "Engineer" with the precedence
defined by the "Last Update" metadata. The "Engineer" of the part with the more recent "Last
Update" date is designated as the Issue Owner.

• By the Oracle User account

• By the Current Issue Owner

Possible scenarios for these last two options include:

• Completely Manual — No Issue Owners are pre-assigned by the database. All designations are done
by Oracle User accounts.

• Partially Automated, Partially Manual — Issue Owners are pre-assigned by the database when the
metadata is available. Missing designations are done by Oracle User accounts.

• Mostly Automated — Issue Owners are pre-assigned by the database with the metadata available
reliably. Some designations are done by Oracle User accounts or current Issue Owners.

16-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Automatic database maintenance

Automatic database maintenance


ClearanceDB automatically performs certain database maintenance functions to assure the integrity of
the data persisted in the ClearanceDB Oracle database. These functions include:

• Running the eaicl_p_clean procedure.

• Monitoring both database space and extent allocations, and providing additional resources or
reporting deficiencies.

• Monitoring the fragmentation of indexes and rebuilding them as required.

The completeness and integrity of the database objects is verified upon all major transactions, including:

• Upgrading the ClearanceDB Oracle application.

• Uploading product configurations.

• Uploading clearance rules and conditions.

• Uploading zone definitions.

• Uploading clearance results.

• Updating clearance issue dispositions.

• Running stored procedures to delete, rename, or copy product data.

The following tablespaces are checked for their type and size:

• Table

• Index

• Rollback (including the existence of the RHUGE rollback segment — Oracle 8i only)

The existence of the following database objects is checked for:

• Tables

• Indexes

• Views

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 16-3


© 2024 Siemens
16. Maintaining the database

• Sequences

• Triggers

• Procedures and functions

• Packages and their bodies

The following relationships are checked for integrity:

• Current values of sequences and the values of corresponding primary keys

ClearanceDB also checks for the completeness of the clearance results upload file. In addition, the
content of the results is examined for the following:

• Non-unique CADIDs

• The presence of geometry change attributes on all parts

• The presence of attributes referenced by clearance requirements rule conditions

• The timestamp of the clearance analysis

Execute stored procedures


To manually perform maintenance on the ClearanceDB database, take the following steps:

1. From the command prompt, type SQLPLUS, and logon as the ClearanceDB user.

2. Type any of the following commands:

Type To do this
exec eaicl_p_clean Delete obsolete objects from the database.

Note:
ClearanceDB automatically runs eaicl_p_clean
when it is necessary to do so. Although you can
manually execute the procedure, it is better to let
ClearanceDB do it for performance reasons.

exec eaicl_p_reset_gc_attr Make subsequent applications absolute rather than


(eaicl_p_product.product_id ('<product incremental.
name>'))

16-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Enforcing the integrity of input data

Type To do this
exec eaicl_p_product.del_product Delete all the data associated with a product.
(eaicl_p_product.product_id ('<product
name>'),'<user_name>')
exec eaicl_p_product.ren_product Rename a product. Only the name of the product
('<old_product name>', '<new_product changes.
name>', '<user_name>')
exec eaicl_p_product.cpy_product Copy a product. All associated data is copied, except
('<old_product name>', '<new_product the issue modification/deletion history.
name>', '<user_name>')

Enforcing the integrity of input data


The ClearanceDB database assumes that input data such as the clearance requirement rulebase or
a product's JT data reflect modeling intent. However, due the complexity of both the product and
requirement models, it is quite feasible that the models presented to the ClearanceDB process result in
data loss.

To help prevent this, the following input data properties can be detected, upon which subsequent results
uploads can be rejected:

• The absence of non-trivial clearance requirements, resulting from either a trivial rulebase, the
complete coverage of exclusion rules, or from the failure of rulebase retrieval

• A substantial (negative) change in the size of the product model or the rulebase, possibly due to the
unintended loss of the input data

Enforcement of the input data integrity is configurable. All exceptions are logged. The following
configuration attributes are available:

• EAICL_PRODUCT_STRUCTURE_CHANGE_TEST — (ON/OFF)

• EAICL_PRODUCT_STRUCTURE_CHANGE_REJECTION_PERCENT — (1-100)

• EAICL_RULEBASE_CHANGE_TEST — (ON/OFF)

• EAICL_RULEBASE_CHANGE_ REJECTION_PERCENT — (1-100)

• EAICL_NON_TRIVIAL_REQUIREMENT_TEST — (ON/OFF)

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 16-5


© 2024 Siemens
16. Maintaining the database

Note:
The REJECTION_PERCENT variable defines the threshold of the decrease in size of the product
structure or the rulebase above which the product or the rulebase update will be rejected. The
size of the product structure is measured in part occurrences. The size of the rulebase is measured
in rules and conditions. The greater of the change in the rules and the change the conditions is
compared against the threshold.

Available status reports


The following database status reports are available:

• Database Installation Summary — The installation success indicator

• Database Installation Detail — Database object after-installation status report, possibly indicating
installation problems per individual objects

• Database Status Summary — The database object status summary

• Database Status Detail — Database object status report, possibly indicating post installation problems
per individual objects

Three reports are available in regard to the ClearanceDB results upload file:

• Non-unique CADID History — All non-unique CADIDs and their cardinality per product update

• Missing Geometry Change Metadata History — All missing metadata per part occurrence and their
cardinality per product update

• Missing Requirement Metadata History — All metadata references in the product requirement
rulebase that are not attached to any of the parts per product update

Note:
The history report retention is controlled by the EAICL_PRODUCT_HISTORY_RETENTION_DAYS
configuration variable.

ClearanceDB maintains four enhanced exception logs:

• Application installation log collecting installation events/exceptions

• Database exception log collecting application exceptions

• Application event log collecting application corrective actions

16-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Available status reports

• User data exception log collecting user data exceptions

These logs are configurable and available as the Database Event History report. All of the event logs have
the following structure:

• EVENT_ID — unique sequential number

• TIMESTAMP — the (server) date/time of the event

• PRODUCT_ID — product id/product name

• CONFIGURATION_ID — configuration id/ product configuration name

• PRODUCT_EVENT — e.g. product update, change in user clearance issue disposition

• DATABASE_EVENT — e.g. insertion of a record

• DATABASE_OBJECT — e.g. table name

• DESCRIPTION — verbose description of the event

Note:
The event log retention is controlled by the EAICL_DATABASE_HISTORY_RETENTION_DAYS
configuration variable. All reports are sortable and subject to the ClearanceDB Reports Time Period
filter.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 16-7


© 2024 Siemens
16. Maintaining the database

16-8 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
17. Troubleshooting
Loading results in the viewer
In the viewer, if the user cannot connect to the ClearanceDB database to obtain results, it may be
because the ClearanceDB results components are not turned on.

Ask the user to turn on the ClearanceDB results components:

1. In the viewer, choose Analysis tab→Clearance group→Enable Clearance Analysis .

2. In the Clearance group, choose Clearance Preferences →Requirement Components.

3. In the Requirement Rule Components dialog box, select Requirement Rules from ClearanceDB
Server.

4. Click OK.

Frozen Clearance Results window


In the viewer, if the Clearance Results window locks up, a results upload process may be operating in
the background.

Ask the user to wait for a few minutes and try again. If the results window does not become active, there
may be a problem with the network or the ClearanceDB database.

Clearance results disappear after user deletes a filter


In the viewer, the user applies a filter to clearance results displayed in the Clearance Results window,
and then deletes it. The user expects the original list of results to appear in the window, but the window
is blank.

This occurs because the clearance results list does not automatically re-post results after an applied filter
is deleted. Ask the user to take the following actions:

1. In the Clearance Results window, right-click, and select Filter.

2. Click Add.

3. Select Column = Number.

4. Select Filter Operator = !=.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 17-1


© 2024 Siemens
17. Troubleshooting

5. Select Value = -1.

6. Click OK.

7. For Filter Input, choose All Items.

8. For Filter Action, choose Show Only.

9. Click OK.

The clearance results should appear again.

Viewer licensing in Teamcenter


To work with ClearanceDB results in Teamcenter you must have a license for the Mockup product
configuration with the Analysis option, and you must specify the licensing for the Lifecycle Viewer and
the Teamcenter embedded viewers.

Visualization service level can be specified in the Visualization Licensing Level option in the
Teamcenter Organization application for the desired user. It is set to Base by default.

Licensing for ClearanceDB is specified in the client_specific.properties file, which is located in the
<RAC_install_location>\plugins\configuration_<version>\ directory on client machines.

Example:
This example shows the visualization licensing parameters in the client_specific.properties file set
with all available options:
PortalViewer_Optional_Licenses=Simplified Rendering,
ECAD,Analysis,Path_Planning,Concept_Desktop,Collaboration,
Visual_Report, STEP, JT_Inspect_Workflow

Note:
If the PortalViewer_Optional_licenses line does not exist, add the following line to the
client_specific.properties file, including the names of applicable functionality options.

This line Requires this information


PortalViewer_Optional_Licenses The names of functionality options not included
in the default product configurations. Type the
values, separated by commas, listed below that
match any additional visualization licenses you
have purchased:

17-2 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Viewer preferences and settings

This line Requires this information


• Simplified_Rendering

• ECAD

• Analysis

• Path_Planning

• Concept_Desktop

• Collaboration

• Visual_Report

• STEP

• JT_Inspect_Workflow

Viewer preferences and settings


Multiple users performing real-time analysis on the same product may receive inconsistent results if the
following viewer preferences and settings are configured differently:

• PLM XML Units — Specifies the unit of measurement for .plmxml files loaded in the viewer. This
option is located on the File tab→Preferences→PLM XML menu.

• Calculator Settings — Specifies clearance options such as the element type. These settings are
located from Analysis tab→Clearance group→Clearance Preferences →Calculator Settings.

Perl compatibility and configuration


ClearanceDB requires Perl version 5.03 or later. If Perl is not already installed on your system or you have
a version earlier than 5.03, many sources are available for you to manually install the latest distribution,
such as from http://www.activestate.com. For conflicts that may arise due to the packaging of Perl
with other applications, particularly Oracle in a Windows environment, this topic provides an overview
of some possible Perl configurations and problem resolutions.

Preliminaries

Before proceeding, do the following to determine if Perl is already installed and specified in the system
PATH environment variable:

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 17-3


© 2024 Siemens
17. Troubleshooting

1. Open a command prompt.

2. Type perl –v and then press Enter.

If Perl is installed, the first line of the command line output displays the version, as shown below:

This is perl, v5.8.0 built for MSWin32-x86-multi-thread


(with 1 registered patch, see perl -V for more detail)

Copyright 1987-2002, Larry Wall

Binary build 806 provided by ActiveState Corp. http://


www.ActiveState.com
Built 16:19:14 Jun 19 2003

Perl may be copied only under the terms of either the Artistic
License or the
GNU General Public License, which may be found in the Perl 5 source
kit.

Complete documentation for Perl, including FAQ lists, should be


found on
this system using `man perl' or `perldoc perl'. If you have access
to the
Internet, point your browser at http://www.perl.com/, the Perl Home
Page.

If Perl cannot be found, it is either not installed or not specified in the system PATH environment
variable.

Possible issues and workarounds

Perl is not installed

You need to install Perl if an installation location is not included in the system PATH environment
variable and the PERL5LIB environment variable is also not defined. For Windows, you can download the
latest ActiveState distribution from http://www.activestate.com. After installing a supported version
of Perl, test the installation as described in the Preliminaries section of this topic to ensure that it is
recognized by the system.

Loading clearance results after an Oracle upgrade


You will need to perform the following procedure if the following scenarios occur:

• After upgrading your Oracle version, if you are unable to load the clearance results from the Clearance
database.

17-4 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
Loading clearance results after an Oracle upgrade

• You encounter errors when uploading to the database using the update_product.pl script. For
example, if you run update_product -ur to update rules and conditions and receive the following
error:

Example:
2021/02/03-11:48:25: Privilege CREATE JOB has not been granted to
CLOWNER.
2021/02/03-11:48:25: The ClearanceDB Oracle user is lacking system
privileges.

1. From a command shell, log in to SQL with SYSDBA privileges.

2. Enter the following at the SQL prompt, where, <clearancedb user name> is the clearancedb user
name.

GRANT CREATE JOB TO <clearancedb user name>;

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 17-5


© 2024 Siemens
17. Troubleshooting

17-6 ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406


© 2024 Siemens
18. Other resources
For detailed information on installing and licensing Mockup, refer to Teamcenter lifecycle visualization
Installation.

For documentation on working with clearance results in standalone Mockup or the Teamcenter Lifecycle
Viewer, refer to Customizing the display of clearance results within Teamcenter lifecycle visualization
help.

For documentation on working with clearance results in Design Context, refer to Performing clearance
analysis and proximity filtering in Design Context in the Teamcenter help.

For help on working with Oracle software, refer to the extensive documentation resources located at
http://docs.oracle.com/en/database/. Oracle provides a wealth of material, including getting started
guides and tutorials.

ClearanceDB ─ Administration, Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization 2406 18-1


© 2024 Siemens

You might also like